1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -1966299584 "ef"
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Note Note
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
191 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 LyX is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
282 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
297 \begin_layout Standard
298 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
300 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
301 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
307 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
308 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
310 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
311 only a vertical scrollbar.
312 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
313 The first case is large images.
314 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
315 image and use the option
321 LaTeX and LyX options
324 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
326 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
327 this doesn't work for equations yet.
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
339 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
346 \begin_layout Section
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
352 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
353 Just select the manual you want to read from the
360 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
364 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
378 \begin_inset Index idx
381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
387 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
388 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
389 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
391 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
392 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
397 \begin_inset space \space{}
400 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
401 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
403 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
407 \begin_inset Index idx
410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
411 Reconfiguration of LyX
416 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
419 \begin_layout Section
421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
423 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
430 \begin_layout Standard
431 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
432 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
434 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
435 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
439 \begin_layout Standard
440 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
442 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
443 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
448 you can view from the menu
450 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
469 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
470 reconfigure LyX (menu
472 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
476 \begin_inset Note Note
479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
480 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
488 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
489 More about TeX Code is described in section
494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
496 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
500 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
507 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
517 \begin_inset Index idx
520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
521 Reconfiguration of LyX
526 See section 5.1 of the
530 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
533 \begin_layout Chapter
537 \begin_layout Section
538 Basic File Operations
539 \begin_inset Index idx
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 \begin_layout Standard
556 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
557 in addition to some more advanced operations:
560 \begin_layout Itemize
582 \begin_layout Itemize
598 arg "buffer-new-template"
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
636 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
684 arg "buffer-write-as"
690 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Itemize
712 arg "dialog-show print"
720 arg "dialog-show print"
726 \begin_layout Itemize
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
742 a few minor differences.
745 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
756 command lists the available templates.
757 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
758 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
759 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
767 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
774 \begin_layout Standard
775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
807 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
808 space is just that — a big, blank space.
816 \begin_layout Standard
837 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
842 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
844 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
862 will reload the document from disk.
863 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
864 and want to restore it to the last save.
873 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
874 them as your changes.
877 \begin_layout Section
878 Basic Editing Features
879 \begin_inset Index idx
882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
891 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
898 \begin_layout Standard
899 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
900 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
901 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
902 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
904 We will start with cut and paste.
907 \begin_layout Standard
908 As you might expect, the
912 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
913 various other editing features.
914 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
918 \begin_layout Itemize
924 \begin_inset Index idx
927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
956 \begin_layout Itemize
962 \begin_inset Index idx
965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
994 \begin_layout Itemize
1000 \begin_inset Index idx
1003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1028 \begin_layout Itemize
1032 \begin_inset space ~
1038 \begin_layout Itemize
1042 \begin_inset space ~
1048 \begin_layout Itemize
1052 \begin_inset space ~
1056 \begin_inset space ~
1062 \begin_inset Index idx
1065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1092 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1102 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1108 \begin_layout Standard
1109 The first three are self-explanatory.
1110 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1131 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1132 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1137 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1138 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1139 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1140 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1141 into individual cells.
1145 \begin_inset space ~
1150 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1151 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1155 \begin_layout Standard
1159 \begin_inset space ~
1164 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1166 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1180 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1181 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1182 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1188 \begin_inset space \space{}
1191 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1192 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1195 \begin_inset space ~
1198 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1200 \begin_inset space ~
1204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1208 \begin_inset space ~
1217 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1218 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1220 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1224 \begin_inset space ~
1229 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1230 start a new paragraph.
1231 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1239 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1256 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1259 paste from the primary selection.
1260 This is normally the currently selected text.
1263 \begin_layout Standard
1266 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1290 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1295 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1312 button to skip the current word.
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1321 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1332 If the toggle is set, searching for
1333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1344 will not match the word
1345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1359 Match whole words only
1361 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1390 LyX offers also an advanced
1393 \begin_inset space ~
1397 \begin_inset space ~
1402 feature that is described in sec.
1403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1409 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1417 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1418 \begin_inset space \space{}
1422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1430 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1432 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1437 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1444 \begin_layout Standard
1448 arg "inset-select-all"
1451 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1452 When the cursor is inside an inset
1455 arg "inset-select-all"
1458 selects the content of the inset.
1462 arg "inset-select-all"
1465 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1470 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1473 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1477 \begin_layout Section
1479 \begin_inset Index idx
1482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1489 \begin_inset Index idx
1492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1501 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1508 \begin_layout Standard
1509 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1510 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1513 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1516 or the toolbar button
1522 to undo some mistake.
1523 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1525 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1528 or the toolbar button
1535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1542 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1550 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1559 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1560 This is a consequence of the 100
1561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1564 step undo limit mentioned above.
1567 \begin_layout Standard
1576 work on almost everything in LyX.
1577 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1581 \begin_layout Section
1583 \begin_inset Index idx
1586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1595 \begin_layout Standard
1596 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1599 \begin_layout Enumerate
1604 \begin_layout Itemize
1609 once anywhere in the edit window.
1610 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1614 \begin_layout Enumerate
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1625 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1628 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1631 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1634 \begin_layout Itemize
1635 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1637 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1644 \begin_layout Enumerate
1645 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1649 \begin_layout Standard
1650 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1651 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1655 \begin_layout Section
1657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1659 name "sec:Navigating"
1664 \begin_inset Index idx
1667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1676 \begin_layout Standard
1677 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1680 \begin_layout Itemize
1685 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1686 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1689 \begin_layout Itemize
1690 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1692 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1694 \begin_inset space ~
1699 or by the toolbar button
1702 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1708 \begin_layout Itemize
1709 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1714 and use the same menu to return to them.
1715 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1722 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1727 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1728 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1730 \begin_inset space ~
1735 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1736 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1737 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1738 your last editing position.
1741 \begin_layout Standard
1746 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1749 \begin_layout Subsection
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1753 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1760 \begin_layout Standard
1761 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1762 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1763 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1771 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1775 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1782 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1787 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1792 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1793 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1794 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1795 dialog and to modify the citation.
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1799 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1801 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1802 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1810 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1814 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1815 you further to control the display.
1820 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1821 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1827 option keeps it in the current view state.
1828 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1829 \begin_inset space ~
1832 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1833 \begin_inset space ~
1836 3, the subsections of sections
1837 \begin_inset space ~
1840 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1845 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1850 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1860 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1863 \begin_layout Standard
1870 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1871 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1885 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1886 So, for example, you can move section
1887 \begin_inset space ~
1891 \begin_inset space ~
1894 2.4 or after section
1895 \begin_inset space ~
1899 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1912 (or the corresponding key bindings
1920 ) you can change the level of sections.
1921 So you can for example make section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \begin_layout Section
1937 Input/Word Completion
1938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1940 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1945 \begin_inset Index idx
1948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1955 \begin_inset Index idx
1958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1992 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1993 is used to propose completions.
1996 \begin_layout Standard
1997 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1999 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2004 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2011 \begin_inset space ~
2015 \begin_inset space ~
2020 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2029 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2030 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2040 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2041 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2042 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2043 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2046 \begin_layout Standard
2047 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2048 are completions available.
2053 key to accept a proposed completion.
2054 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2055 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2056 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2063 \begin_layout Standard
2064 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2065 ing options for text.
2066 The special math option
2070 enables characters to be composed.
2071 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2072 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2075 , you can then input the characters
2076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2087 to a formula to get it.
2088 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2089 of the math toolbar.
2090 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2094 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2095 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2104 \begin_layout Section
2106 \begin_inset Index idx
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset Index idx
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2182 \begin_layout Standard
2183 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2196 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2198 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2202 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2209 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2220 \begin_inset space ~
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2249 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2253 \begin_layout Labeling
2254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2258 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2259 LatexCommand nomenclature
2261 description "Tabulator key"
2267 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2268 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2269 \begin_inset space ~
2273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2275 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2282 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2286 , especially section
2287 \begin_inset space ~
2291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2293 reference "sub:Lists"
2299 If you are still confused, look in the
2304 \begin_inset Newline newline
2311 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2312 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2316 \begin_layout Labeling
2317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2321 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2322 LatexCommand nomenclature
2324 description "Escape key"
2331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2338 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2339 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2342 \begin_layout Labeling
2343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2349 \begin_inset space ~
2353 \begin_inset space ~
2360 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2361 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2365 \begin_layout Standard
2366 There are three modifier keys:
2369 \begin_layout Labeling
2370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2388 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2389 LatexCommand nomenclature
2391 description "Control key"
2395 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2396 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2400 \begin_layout Itemize
2409 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2437 \begin_layout Labeling
2438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Shift key"
2463 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2464 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2467 \begin_layout Labeling
2468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2486 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2487 LatexCommand nomenclature
2489 description "Alt or Meta key"
2493 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2494 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2495 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2501 \begin_inset Newline newline
2504 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2506 menu accelerator keys
2509 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2510 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2514 \begin_layout Standard
2515 For example, the sequence
2516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2522 \begin_inset space ~
2526 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2575 \begin_layout Standard
2580 manual lists all other things bound to the
2588 \begin_layout Standard
2589 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2590 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2591 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2592 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2593 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2594 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2595 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2597 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2613 followed by a capital
2620 \begin_layout Chapter
2622 \begin_inset Index idx
2625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2634 \begin_layout Section
2636 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2648 \begin_layout Subsection
2652 \begin_layout Standard
2653 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2654 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2655 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2656 numbering schemes, and so on.
2657 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2658 and format the title of your document differently.
2661 \begin_layout Standard
2666 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2667 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2668 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2669 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2670 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2673 \begin_layout Subsection
2675 \begin_inset Index idx
2678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2687 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2694 \begin_layout Standard
2695 You can select a class using the
2697 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2698 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2702 \begin_inset Index idx
2705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2712 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2720 \begin_layout Standard
2721 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2725 \begin_layout Description
2726 Article for basic articles
2729 \begin_layout Description
2730 Report for basic reports
2733 \begin_layout Description
2734 Book for writing a book
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Letter for US-style letters
2741 \begin_layout Standard
2742 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2743 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2744 will include many of these.
2745 Here are some of the classes.
2746 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2748 Special Document Classes
2757 \begin_layout Description
2758 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2761 \begin_layout Description
2762 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2773 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2774 There are three article layouts available.
2775 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2776 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2777 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2778 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2783 sequential numbering
2784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2787 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2788 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2789 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2790 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2793 \begin_layout Description
2794 Beamer Layout for presentations
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2799 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2807 \begin_layout Description
2809 \begin_inset space ~
2812 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2819 \begin_layout Description
2820 Foils Used to make transparencies
2823 \begin_layout Description
2824 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2825 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2831 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2838 \begin_layout Description
2839 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2844 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2845 (Is used by this document.)
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2852 \begin_layout Description
2853 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2856 \begin_layout Description
2861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2868 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2869 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2871 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2874 \begin_layout Description
2875 Slides Used to make transparencies
2878 \begin_layout Description
2880 \begin_inset space ~
2883 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2884 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2887 \begin_layout Description
2888 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2891 \begin_layout Standard
2892 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2894 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2900 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2901 of the document classes.
2904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2908 \begin_layout Standard
2909 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2911 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2912 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2914 \begin_inset Index idx
2917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2934 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2935 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2937 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2942 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2943 and some of them, like
2947 , are highly specialized.
2948 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2949 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2951 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2952 by some document class.
2953 There are just too many of them.
2954 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2957 \begin_layout Standard
2958 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2966 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2967 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2968 document class for a new file.
2969 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2974 Installing new LaTeX files
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2982 manual for information on how to install them.
2983 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2989 \begin_layout Standard
2990 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2991 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2993 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2994 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2995 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2997 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3001 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3007 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3019 \begin_inset Index idx
3022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3031 \begin_layout Standard
3032 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3033 chosen document class.
3034 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3035 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3042 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3046 \begin_inset Index idx
3049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3056 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3060 \begin_layout Standard
3061 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3062 always installed by default.
3063 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3064 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3065 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3066 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3067 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3068 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3069 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3072 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3076 \begin_inset Index idx
3079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3080 Reconfiguration of LyX
3086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3089 Installing new LaTeX files
3090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3097 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3100 \begin_layout Standard
3101 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3109 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3110 LyX will advise you about these things.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3122 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3127 \begin_inset Index idx
3130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3131 Document ! Local Layout
3139 \begin_layout Standard
3140 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3141 used in a variety of different documents.
3142 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3143 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3144 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3145 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3146 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3147 What you want is LyX's
3148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3164 manual for information on how to use it.
3167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3171 \begin_layout Standard
3172 Each class has a default set of options.
3173 Here's a quick table describing them:
3176 \begin_layout Standard
3177 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3185 \begin_inset Tabular
3186 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3187 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3646 \begin_layout Standard
3647 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3653 \begin_layout Standard
3654 You're probably also wondering what
3655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3659 \begin_inset space ~
3663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3667 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3668 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3673 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3678 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3688 headings, there are also
3696 headings, and so on.
3697 We will describe these headings fully in section
3698 \begin_inset space ~
3702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3704 reference "sub:Headings"
3711 \begin_layout Subsection
3713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3715 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3720 \begin_inset Index idx
3723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 \begin_inset Index idx
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_layout Standard
3743 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3745 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3752 \begin_inset space ~
3760 \begin_inset space ~
3765 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3767 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3768 to use for your document.
3769 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3773 \begin_layout Standard
3777 \begin_inset space ~
3784 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3790 \begin_inset space ~
3795 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3796 You can choose between the following five options:
3799 \begin_layout Labeling
3800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3805 Use default page style of current class.
3808 \begin_layout Labeling
3809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3814 No page numbers or headings.
3817 \begin_layout Labeling
3818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 \begin_layout Labeling
3827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3832 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3833 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3834 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3837 \begin_layout Labeling
3838 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3843 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3844 have the LaTeX-package
3849 \begin_inset Index idx
3852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3853 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3859 How they are defined is explained in section
3860 \begin_inset space ~
3864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3866 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3875 \begin_inset space ~
3879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3881 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3888 \begin_layout Subsection
3889 Paper Size and Orientation
3890 \begin_inset Index idx
3893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3894 Document ! Paper size
3900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3902 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3909 \begin_layout Standard
3910 You can find the following options in the menu
3913 \begin_inset space ~
3920 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3924 \begin_inset Index idx
3927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3936 \begin_layout Labeling
3937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3941 \begin_inset space ~
3946 What size paper to print on.
3951 \begin_layout Itemize
3957 \begin_layout Itemize
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3978 US letter, US legal, US executive
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3994 \begin_layout Labeling
3995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4000 To choose whether to output as
4011 \begin_layout Labeling
4012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4016 \begin_inset space ~
4021 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4022 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4025 \begin_layout Subsection
4027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4034 \begin_inset Index idx
4037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4044 \begin_inset Index idx
4047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_layout Standard
4057 Paper margins are set in the menu
4059 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4063 \begin_inset Index idx
4066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4075 \begin_layout Standard
4076 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4077 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4078 the paper format and the font size into account.
4081 \begin_layout Subsection
4085 \begin_layout Standard
4086 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4091 That includes the paragraph environments.
4092 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4093 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4094 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4095 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4104 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4106 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4107 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4108 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4111 \begin_layout Section
4112 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4117 Paragraph ! Indentation
4125 \begin_layout Subsection
4127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4129 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4137 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4138 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4143 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4144 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4145 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4149 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4155 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4156 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4157 language than English.
4158 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4162 \begin_layout Standard
4163 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4164 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4166 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4167 LyX takes care of that.
4168 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4170 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4171 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4172 of a page, and so on.
4176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4177 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4182 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4183 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4187 these pre-coded spacings.
4188 We will explain more later.
4191 \begin_layout Subsection
4192 Paragraph Separation
4193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4195 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4200 \begin_inset Index idx
4203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4204 Paragraph ! Separation
4212 \begin_layout Standard
4220 \begin_inset space ~
4228 \begin_inset space ~
4235 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4239 \begin_inset Index idx
4242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4248 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4251 \begin_layout Subsection
4255 \begin_layout Standard
4256 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4259 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4261 \begin_inset space ~
4266 dialog and toggle the
4269 \begin_inset space ~
4274 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4277 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4281 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4282 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4287 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4288 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4293 \begin_inset Index idx
4296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4297 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4305 \begin_layout Standard
4308 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4312 \begin_inset Index idx
4315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4324 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4328 \begin_inset space ~
4337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4338 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4343 \begin_inset Index idx
4346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4347 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4352 installed to use this feature.
4357 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4359 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4361 \begin_inset space ~
4366 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4367 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4370 \begin_layout Section
4371 Paragraph Environments
4372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4374 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4379 \begin_inset Index idx
4382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 Paragraph ! Environments
4389 \begin_inset Index idx
4392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 Paragraph environments|(
4401 \begin_layout Subsection
4405 \begin_layout Standard
4406 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4409 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset Newline newline
4431 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4432 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4433 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4442 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4446 A paragraph environment is simply a
4447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4454 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4455 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4456 scheme, labels, and so on.
4457 Additionally, you can
4458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4465 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4466 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4467 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4468 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4470 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4472 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4475 \begin_layout Standard
4476 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4477 \begin_inset Graphics
4478 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4484 at the left end of the toolbar.
4485 LyX will change the environment of the
4489 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4490 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4491 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4504 create a new paragraph using the
4508 paragraph environment.
4510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4517 because if you are in one of these environments:
4520 \begin_layout Itemize
4526 \begin_layout Itemize
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Standard
4563 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4567 , rather than resetting it to
4572 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4573 \begin_inset space ~
4577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4579 reference "sec:Nesting"
4586 \begin_layout Subsection
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4591 The default paragraph environment is
4596 It creates a plain paragraph.
4597 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4598 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4599 this manual) are in the
4606 \begin_layout Standard
4607 You can nest a paragraph using the
4611 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4619 \begin_layout Subsection
4621 \begin_inset Index idx
4624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4633 \begin_layout Standard
4634 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4643 for thanks or contact information.
4644 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4645 page along with today's date.
4646 For other types of documents, the title
4647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4654 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4658 \begin_layout Standard
4659 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4673 Here's how you use them:
4676 \begin_layout Itemize
4677 Put the title of your document in the
4684 \begin_layout Itemize
4685 Put the author name in the
4692 \begin_layout Itemize
4693 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4694 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4700 Note that using this environment is optional.
4701 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4702 If you don't want a date, use the option
4704 Suppress default date on front page
4708 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4709 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4711 \begin_inset space ~
4719 \begin_layout Standard
4720 You can use footnotes to insert
4721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4728 or contact information.
4731 \begin_layout Subsection
4733 \begin_inset Index idx
4736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4752 \begin_layout Standard
4753 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4754 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4757 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4759 \begin_inset Index idx
4762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4763 Section headings ! Numbered
4771 \begin_layout Standard
4772 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4776 \begin_layout Enumerate
4782 \begin_layout Enumerate
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Standard
4819 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4820 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4821 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4824 \begin_layout Standard
4825 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4826 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4827 You group the book into chapters.
4828 LyX does a similar grouping:
4831 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 is divided into either
4847 \begin_layout Itemize
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Standard
4908 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4916 Not all document types use the
4920 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4925 is the top-level heading.
4933 \begin_layout Standard
4938 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4939 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4941 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4955 \begin_inset Index idx
4958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4959 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4967 \begin_layout Standard
4968 The unnumbered section headings have a
4969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4976 at the end of their name.
4977 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4978 the table of contents, see section
4979 \begin_inset space ~
4983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4993 Changing the Numbering
4994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4996 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5005 in the Table of Contents.
5006 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5008 Just as certain classes start with
5022 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5032 This is something you can change.
5035 \begin_layout Standard
5038 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5042 \begin_inset Index idx
5045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5054 \begin_inset space ~
5058 \begin_inset space ~
5063 you will see two counters.
5068 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5070 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5074 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5075 Short Titles of Headings
5076 \begin_inset Index idx
5079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5080 Section headings ! Short titles
5086 \begin_inset Argument 1
5089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5098 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5107 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5108 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5109 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5112 \begin_layout Standard
5113 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5114 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5115 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5116 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5119 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5121 \begin_inset space ~
5127 This will insert a box labeled
5128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5139 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5140 This also works for captions inside floats.
5141 There can only be one short title per title.
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5145 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 The following information applies to all section headings:
5156 \begin_layout Itemize
5157 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5160 \begin_layout Itemize
5161 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5164 \begin_layout Itemize
5165 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5172 \begin_layout Subsection
5176 \begin_layout Standard
5177 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5191 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5192 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5193 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5194 the text they contain.
5195 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5203 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5206 \begin_layout Standard
5207 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5216 when you start a new paragraph.
5217 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5221 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5222 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5223 have to change back to the
5227 environment yourself.
5230 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5239 \begin_inset Index idx
5242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5253 time for the differences.
5262 are identical except for one difference:
5266 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5275 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5278 \begin_layout Standard
5279 Here's an example of the
5292 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5294 See – no indentation!
5298 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5299 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5300 the other paragraph.
5303 \begin_layout Standard
5304 Here's another example, this time in the
5311 \begin_layout Quotation
5317 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5318 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5319 the first line, then
5323 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5327 you were quoting other text.
5330 \begin_layout Quotation
5331 Here's a new paragraph.
5332 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5333 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5337 As the examples show,
5341 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5342 They should put quotes in the
5347 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5351 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5354 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5356 \begin_inset Index idx
5359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5366 \begin_inset Index idx
5369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5390 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5396 \begin_inset Newline newline
5399 Which I did not rehearse!
5403 It could be much worse.
5404 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5406 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5407 indented a bit more than the first.
5408 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5414 \begin_inset Newline newline
5417 And make things look fine
5418 \begin_inset Newline newline
5424 arg "newline-insert newline"
5430 \begin_layout Standard
5435 does not indent both margins.
5436 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5437 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5440 arg "newline-insert newline"
5446 \begin_layout Subsection
5448 \begin_inset Index idx
5451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5468 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5478 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5487 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5488 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5489 describing some general features of all four of them.
5492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5496 \begin_layout Standard
5497 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5499 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5508 reset the environment to
5512 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5513 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5514 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5518 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5522 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5531 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5533 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5534 you read all of section
5535 \begin_inset space ~
5539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5541 reference "sec:Nesting"
5548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5550 \begin_inset Index idx
5553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5569 \begin_layout Standard
5570 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5574 paragraph environment.
5575 It has the following properties:
5578 \begin_layout Itemize
5579 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5583 \begin_layout Itemize
5584 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5587 \begin_layout Itemize
5588 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5592 \begin_layout Itemize
5593 The items can have any length.
5594 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5595 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5602 \begin_layout Itemize
5607 environment inside another
5611 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5615 \begin_layout Itemize
5616 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5619 \begin_layout Itemize
5620 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5623 \begin_layout Itemize
5625 \begin_inset space ~
5629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5631 reference "sec:Nesting"
5635 for a full explanation of nesting.
5639 \begin_layout Standard
5640 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5649 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5652 \begin_layout Standard
5653 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5654 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5657 \begin_layout Itemize
5658 The label for the first level
5662 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5666 \begin_layout Itemize
5667 The label for the second level is a dash.
5671 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5676 \begin_layout Itemize
5677 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5681 \begin_layout Itemize
5682 Back out to the third level.
5686 \begin_layout Itemize
5687 Back to the second level.
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5692 Back to the outermost level.
5695 \begin_layout Standard
5696 These are the default labels for an
5701 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5703 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5706 dialog in the submenu
5711 \begin_inset Index idx
5714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5720 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5723 \begin_layout Standard
5724 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5725 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5727 \begin_inset space ~
5731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5733 reference "sec:Nesting"
5740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5754 name "sec:Enumerate"
5761 \begin_layout Standard
5766 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5767 It has these properties:
5770 \begin_layout Enumerate
5771 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5775 \begin_layout Enumerate
5776 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5780 \begin_layout Enumerate
5781 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5784 \begin_layout Enumerate
5789 environment resets the counter to one.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5805 \begin_layout Enumerate
5806 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5807 Items can have any length.
5810 \begin_layout Enumerate
5811 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5814 \begin_layout Enumerate
5815 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5818 \begin_layout Enumerate
5819 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5832 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5833 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5840 \begin_layout Enumerate
5841 The first level of an
5845 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5849 \begin_layout Enumerate
5850 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5854 \begin_layout Enumerate
5855 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5859 \begin_layout Enumerate
5860 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5863 \begin_layout Enumerate
5864 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5869 \begin_layout Enumerate
5870 Back to the third level
5874 \begin_layout Enumerate
5875 Back to the second level.
5879 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 Back to the outermost level.
5883 \begin_layout Standard
5884 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5888 environment, see section
5889 \begin_inset space ~
5893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5895 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5900 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5904 There is more to nesting
5908 environments than we've stated here.
5909 You should read section
5910 \begin_inset space ~
5914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5916 reference "sec:Nesting"
5920 to learn more about nesting.
5923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5925 \begin_inset Index idx
5928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5937 \begin_layout Standard
5938 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5942 list has no fixed label.
5943 Instead, LyX uses the first
5944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5951 of the first line as the label.
5955 \begin_layout Description
5956 Example: This is an example of the
5963 \begin_layout Standard
5964 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5968 \begin_layout Standard
5970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5977 it is meant that the first usage of the
5981 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5983 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5991 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
5996 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5997 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5999 \begin_inset space ~
6005 \begin_inset space ~
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6011 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6015 for more information.) Here is an example:
6018 \begin_layout Description
6020 \begin_inset space ~
6023 Example: This one shows how to use a
6026 \begin_inset space ~
6038 \begin_layout Description
6039 Usage: You should use the
6043 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6044 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6046 It's not a good idea to use a
6050 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6051 You're better off using
6063 paragraphs into them.
6066 \begin_layout Description
6067 Nesting: You can nest
6071 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6075 \begin_layout Standard
6076 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6077 them from the first line.
6080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6082 \begin_inset Index idx
6085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6094 \begin_layout Standard
6099 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6102 \begin_layout Standard
6111 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6113 Here are its properties:
6116 \begin_layout Labeling
6117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6119 \begin_inset space ~
6122 labels LyX uses the first
6123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6130 of each line as the item label.
6135 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6136 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6137 space as described above.
6140 \begin_layout Labeling
6141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6142 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6143 the body of the item text.
6144 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6145 label width plus a little extra space.
6149 \begin_layout Labeling
6150 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6152 \begin_inset space ~
6155 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6157 If the label width is larger, the label
6158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6165 into the first line.
6166 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6167 margin of the rest of the item text.
6170 \begin_layout Labeling
6171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6176 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6181 environment has the same left margin.
6182 \begin_inset Newline newline
6185 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6188 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6190 \begin_inset space ~
6195 dialog (toolbar button
6198 arg "layout-paragraph"
6205 \begin_inset space ~
6210 determines the default label width.
6211 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6220 multiple times instead.
6221 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6230 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6233 \begin_inset space ~
6238 every time you alter a label in a
6243 \begin_inset Newline newline
6246 The predefined default width is the length of
6247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6261 \begin_layout Standard
6266 list the same way as the
6270 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6276 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6280 \begin_layout Standard
6285 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6286 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6288 \begin_inset space ~
6292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6294 reference "sec:Nesting"
6298 to learn about nesting.
6301 \begin_layout Standard
6302 There is yet another feature of the
6306 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6308 You can use additional
6312 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6317 are documented in section
6318 \begin_inset space ~
6322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6324 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6329 Here are some examples:
6332 \begin_layout Labeling
6333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6334 Left The default for
6341 \begin_layout Labeling
6342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6343 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6350 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6359 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6366 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6369 \begin_layout Subsection
6371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6373 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6378 \begin_inset Index idx
6381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6391 The features described in this section require that the module
6393 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6395 is loaded in the document settings.
6396 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6401 \begin_inset Index idx
6404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6405 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6414 Custom Enumerate Lists
6415 \begin_inset Index idx
6418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6419 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6427 \begin_layout Standard
6429 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6432 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6435 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6436 There you add the command
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6447 \begin_layout Standard
6448 in TeX Code (shortcut
6458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6459 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6466 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6479 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6486 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6487 For capital Roman numerals replace
6499 in the command above.
6500 For Arabic numerals use
6508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6515 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6540 You can only number 26
6541 \begin_inset space ~
6544 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6553 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6554 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6561 \begin_layout Enumerate
6562 \begin_inset Argument 1
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6591 \begin_layout Enumerate
6592 \begin_inset Argument 1
6595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6618 \begin_layout Enumerate
6623 \begin_layout Enumerate
6624 \begin_inset Argument 1
6627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6651 \begin_layout Enumerate
6652 \begin_inset Argument 1
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 \begin_layout Standard
6682 For this list these commands were used:
6685 \begin_layout Standard
6696 \begin_inset Newline newline
6704 \begin_inset Newline newline
6712 \begin_inset Newline newline
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6729 makes the label emphasized and
6738 \begin_layout Standard
6739 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6748 lists until you change the definition.
6756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6758 \begin_inset Index idx
6761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6762 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6770 \begin_layout Standard
6771 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6774 \begin_layout Enumerate
6775 \begin_inset Argument 1
6778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_inset Note Note
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6801 goes back to default numbering
6809 \begin_layout Enumerate
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6821 \begin_layout Standard
6822 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6827 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6828 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6840 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6848 \begin_layout Standard
6849 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6851 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6852 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6853 of a normal enumeration.
6854 There, insert the command
6857 \begin_layout Standard
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6868 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6872 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_layout Enumerate
6880 \begin_layout Standard
6881 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_inset Argument 1
6888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 This enumeration starts at 4
6907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6909 \begin_inset Index idx
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6922 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6924 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6927 \begin_layout Itemize
6931 \begin_layout Itemize
6932 with standard spacing
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6936 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6938 Add there the command
6942 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6945 \begin_layout Itemize
6946 \begin_inset Argument 1
6949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6968 \begin_layout Itemize
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6983 \begin_inset Index idx
6986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6987 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6993 For more information see its documentation,
6994 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7003 \begin_layout Standard
7004 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7006 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7007 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7011 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7014 \begin_layout Enumerate
7015 \begin_inset Argument 1
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7039 \begin_layout Enumerate
7040 with negative indentation
7043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7044 Further Customization
7045 \begin_inset Index idx
7048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 Lists ! Customization
7057 \begin_layout Standard
7058 You can also change the style of description lists.
7062 \begin_layout Standard
7068 \begin_layout Standard
7069 changes the description label font, the command
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7079 sets the list style.
7082 \begin_layout Standard
7083 An example where the command
7086 \begin_layout Standard
7091 itshape, style=nextline
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7098 \begin_layout Description
7100 \begin_inset space ~
7104 \begin_inset Argument 1
7107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7113 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7115 itshape, style=nextline
7125 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7126 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7130 \begin_layout Description
7132 \begin_inset space ~
7135 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7136 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7137 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7141 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7147 \begin_inset Index idx
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7151 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7157 For more information see its documentation
7158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7167 \begin_layout Subsection
7169 \begin_inset Index idx
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7183 \begin_inset space ~
7186 Address: An Overview
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7198 \begin_inset space ~
7204 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7205 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7206 In contrast, you can use the
7213 \begin_inset space ~
7218 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7219 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7223 \begin_layout Standard
7224 Of course, you're not limited to using
7231 \begin_inset space ~
7240 \begin_inset space ~
7245 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7246 some European academic papers.
7249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7253 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7265 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7266 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7270 \begin_inset space ~
7275 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7276 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7277 Here's an example of each:
7280 \begin_layout Right Address
7282 \begin_inset Newline newline
7286 \begin_inset Newline newline
7290 \begin_inset Newline newline
7293 When is it? What is today?
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7300 \begin_inset space ~
7306 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7307 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7308 Here's an example of the
7315 \begin_layout Address
7317 \begin_inset Newline newline
7320 Where do I send this
7321 \begin_inset Newline newline
7324 Your post office and country
7327 \begin_layout Standard
7328 As you can see, both
7335 \begin_inset space ~
7340 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7345 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7351 This makes sense, since
7359 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7360 Thus, you have to use
7367 arg "newline-insert newline"
7372 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7373 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7375 \begin_inset space ~
7379 \begin_inset space ~
7384 ) to start a new line in an
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7399 \begin_layout Subsection
7403 \begin_layout Standard
7404 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7405 or list of references.
7406 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7411 \begin_inset Index idx
7414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7428 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7429 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7430 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7431 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7445 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7446 The book document classes ignores the
7450 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7454 in a letter document class.
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7462 environment does several things for you.
7463 First, it puts the centered label
7464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7472 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7474 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7475 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7476 the subsequent text.
7477 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7478 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7487 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7488 The new paragraph will still be in the
7493 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7494 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7497 \begin_layout Standard
7498 \begin_inset Float figure
7503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7505 \begin_inset Graphics
7506 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7514 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7519 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7540 \begin_layout Standard
7541 We would love to demonstrate the
7545 environment, but since this document is in the
7546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7553 class, we can't do this.
7554 We inserted it therefore as figure
7555 \begin_inset space ~
7559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7561 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7566 If you have never heard of an
7567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7574 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7579 \begin_inset Index idx
7582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7591 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7603 environment is used to list references.
7604 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7605 only use it at the end of the document.
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 When you first open a
7622 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7638 depending on the document class.
7639 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7640 Each paragraph of the
7644 environment is a bibliography entry.
7649 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7650 Each new paragraph is still in the
7657 \begin_layout Standard
7658 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7659 by using a BibTeX database.
7660 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7661 phy handling, have a look at section
7662 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7668 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7675 \begin_layout Subsection
7676 Special Environments
7679 \begin_layout Standard
7680 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7681 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7688 \begin_inset Index idx
7691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7707 \begin_layout Standard
7712 environment is a LyX extension.
7713 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7718 key as a fixed whitespace.
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7734 \begin_inset space ~
7739 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7752 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7754 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7757 arg "newline-insert newline"
7774 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7775 So, when you finish using the
7779 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7780 Also, you can nest the
7784 environment inside of others.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7791 \begin_layout Itemize
7795 arg "newline-insert newline"
7798 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7803 \begin_inset space \space{}
7813 arg "newline-insert newline"
7819 \begin_layout Itemize
7823 arg "newline-insert newline"
7833 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7839 \begin_layout Itemize
7840 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7841 You must put at least one
7845 in any line you want blank.
7846 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7849 \begin_layout Itemize
7850 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7854 since that will insert
7859 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7862 arg "self-insert \""
7868 \begin_layout Standard
7872 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7876 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7880 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7889 printf("Hello World!
7894 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7898 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7902 \begin_layout Standard
7903 This is just the standard
7904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7915 \begin_layout Standard
7920 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7922 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7923 as if you used a typewriter.
7924 \begin_inset Index idx
7927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7928 Paragraph environments|)
7933 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7936 Program Code Listings
7941 \begin_inset space ~
7949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7953 \begin_inset Index idx
7956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7965 \begin_layout Standard
7970 environment is similar to the
7974 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7975 computer console text.
7980 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
7993 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
7994 you can have empty lines.
8006 \begin_layout Itemize
8007 have a certain language and a text style
8010 \begin_layout Itemize
8011 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8012 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8016 \begin_layout Standard
8017 Because of these properties
8021 works like a typewriter.
8025 \begin_layout Verbatim
8030 \begin_layout Verbatim
8034 The following 2 lines are empty:
8037 \begin_layout Verbatim
8041 \begin_layout Verbatim
8045 \begin_layout Verbatim
8047 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8052 \begin_layout Section
8053 Nesting Environments
8054 \begin_inset Index idx
8057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8058 Nesting ! Environments
8064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8073 \begin_layout Subsection
8077 \begin_layout Standard
8078 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8080 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8082 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8084 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8096 \begin_layout Enumerate
8100 \begin_layout Enumerate
8105 \begin_layout Enumerate
8109 \begin_layout Enumerate
8114 \begin_layout Enumerate
8118 \begin_layout Standard
8119 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8120 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8122 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8124 \begin_inset space ~
8128 \begin_inset space ~
8136 \begin_inset space ~
8140 \begin_inset space ~
8145 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8147 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8150 arg "depth-increment"
8156 arg "depth-decrement"
8170 arg "depth-increment"
8176 arg "depth-decrement"
8180 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8181 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8185 \begin_layout Standard
8186 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8187 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8188 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8189 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8194 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8196 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8199 \begin_layout Subsection
8200 What You Can and Can't Nest
8203 \begin_layout Standard
8204 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8205 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8208 \begin_layout Standard
8209 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8210 than a simple yes or no.
8211 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8214 \begin_layout Itemize
8215 Completely unnestable
8218 \begin_layout Itemize
8219 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8223 \begin_layout Itemize
8224 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8228 \begin_layout Standard
8229 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8230 environments have them:
8233 \begin_layout Description
8234 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8235 Can't nest into them.
8239 \begin_layout Itemize
8245 \begin_layout Itemize
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8257 \begin_layout Itemize
8263 \begin_layout Itemize
8270 \begin_layout Description
8272 \begin_inset space ~
8275 Nestable You can nest them.
8276 You can nest other things into them.
8280 \begin_layout Itemize
8286 \begin_layout Itemize
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8335 \begin_layout Description
8336 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8337 You can't nest anything into them.
8341 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Itemize
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 \begin_layout Itemize
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8401 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8423 \begin_inset space ~
8429 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 \begin_layout Standard
8437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8455 \begin_inset space ~
8458 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8459 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8460 nested section headings violate this.
8468 \begin_layout Subsection
8469 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8470 \begin_inset Index idx
8473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8474 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8482 \begin_layout Standard
8483 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8484 affected by nesting anyhow.
8488 \begin_layout Itemize
8492 \begin_layout Itemize
8496 \begin_layout Itemize
8500 \begin_layout Standard
8502 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8510 Figures and tables in
8514 are not affected by this.
8519 Have a look at section
8520 \begin_inset space ~
8524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8526 reference "sec:Floats"
8530 for more information about
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8539 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8543 \begin_layout Standard
8544 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8552 of its own, it behaves just like a
8553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8560 paragraph environment.
8561 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 Here's an example with a table:
8569 \begin_layout Enumerate
8574 \begin_layout Enumerate
8575 This is (a) and it's nested.
8579 \begin_layout Standard
8580 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8588 \begin_inset Tabular
8589 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8590 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8677 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8684 \begin_layout Enumerate
8686 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8690 \begin_layout Enumerate
8694 \begin_layout Standard
8695 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8698 \begin_layout Enumerate
8703 \begin_layout Enumerate
8704 This is (a) and it's nested.
8708 \begin_layout Standard
8709 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8717 \begin_inset Tabular
8718 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8719 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8720 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8721 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8805 \begin_layout Standard
8806 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8812 \begin_layout Enumerate
8819 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8822 \begin_layout Enumerate
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8827 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8831 \begin_layout Standard
8832 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8834 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8837 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 This is (a) and it's nested.
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8855 \begin_inset Tabular
8856 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8857 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8944 \begin_layout Standard
8945 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8951 \begin_layout Enumerate
8953 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8960 \begin_layout Enumerate
8964 \begin_layout Standard
8965 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8971 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8972 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8976 \begin_layout Subsection
8977 Usage and General Features
8980 \begin_layout Standard
8981 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8990 is the innermost possible depth.
8991 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8994 \begin_layout Enumerate
8995 level #1 – outermost
8999 \begin_layout Enumerate
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9009 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Itemize
9019 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9030 both of them in the example.
9031 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9041 For example, if we tried to nest another
9046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9053 , we would get errors.
9056 \begin_layout Subsection
9058 \begin_inset Index idx
9061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9070 \begin_layout Standard
9071 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9072 We have several examples of nested environments.
9073 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9077 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9078 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9081 \begin_layout Labeling
9082 \labelwidthstring MMM
9083 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9092 \begin_layout Labeling
9093 \labelwidthstring MMM
9094 #2-a This is level #2.
9095 We created it by using
9098 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9104 arg "depth-increment"
9111 \begin_layout Labeling
9112 \labelwidthstring MMM
9113 #3-a This is level #3.
9114 This time, we just enter
9121 arg "depth-increment"
9125 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9129 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9135 arg "depth-increment"
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9147 environment, nested inside of
9148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9156 So, it's at level #4.
9157 We did this by entering
9160 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9166 arg "depth-increment"
9169 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9174 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9195 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9198 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9204 \begin_layout Labeling
9205 \labelwidthstring MMM
9206 #4-a This is level #4.
9210 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9213 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9218 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9222 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9227 keep nesting things inside
9228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9239 \begin_layout Labeling
9240 \labelwidthstring MMM
9241 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9246 \begin_layout Labeling
9247 \labelwidthstring MMM
9248 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9249 and this is level #6.
9250 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9254 \begin_layout Labeling
9255 \labelwidthstring MMM
9256 #5-b Back to level #5.
9260 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9266 arg "depth-decrement"
9273 \begin_layout Labeling
9274 \labelwidthstring MMM
9278 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9284 arg "depth-decrement"
9287 , we're back at level #4.
9291 \begin_layout Labeling
9292 \labelwidthstring MMM
9293 #3-b Back to level #3.
9294 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9298 \begin_layout Labeling
9299 \labelwidthstring MMM
9300 #2-b Back to level #2.
9305 \begin_layout Labeling
9306 \labelwidthstring MMM
9307 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9308 After this sentence, we will enter
9312 and change the paragraph environment back to
9319 \begin_layout Standard
9320 We could have also used the
9336 environment in place of the
9341 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9345 Example 2: Inheritance
9348 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9349 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9352 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9361 arg "depth-increment"
9365 \begin_inset Newline newline
9368 which, we will change to the
9376 \begin_layout Enumerate
9381 environment, at level #2.
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9385 Notice how the nested
9389 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9393 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9397 \begin_layout Standard
9398 We ended this example by entering
9403 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9407 and reset the nesting depth by using
9410 arg "depth-decrement"
9416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9417 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9426 \begin_inset Argument 1
9429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9430 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9438 \begin_layout Enumerate
9439 This is level #1, in an
9443 paragraph environment.
9444 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9448 \begin_layout Enumerate
9453 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9459 arg "depth-increment"
9463 Now, what happens if we nest an
9467 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9468 label be? An asterisk?
9472 \begin_layout Itemize
9482 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9483 So, its label is a bullet.
9484 (We got here by using
9487 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9493 arg "depth-increment"
9496 , then changing the environment to
9504 \begin_layout Itemize
9505 Here's level #4, produced using
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9518 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9523 \begin_layout Enumerate
9524 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9526 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9531 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9535 , because we are in the
9543 environment (that is, it is an
9558 \begin_layout Enumerate
9563 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9564 type of numbering does LyX use?
9567 \begin_layout Enumerate
9568 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9571 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9574 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9577 \begin_layout Enumerate
9581 arg "depth-decrement"
9584 to decrease the depth after the next
9587 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9594 \begin_layout Enumerate
9596 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9600 \begin_layout Enumerate
9602 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9603 numeral as the label.Why?
9606 \begin_layout Enumerate
9607 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9616 Notice, however, that LyX
9620 reset the counter for the label.
9624 \begin_layout Enumerate
9628 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9634 arg "depth-decrement"
9637 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9638 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9639 into the twofold-nested
9647 \begin_layout Enumerate
9648 The same thing happens if we do another
9651 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9657 arg "depth-decrement"
9660 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9669 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9683 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9689 The same rule applies for the
9693 environment, as well.
9696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9697 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9700 \begin_layout Enumerate
9701 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9702 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9703 the same detail with how we did it.
9712 \begin_layout Standard
9720 arg "depth-increment"
9727 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9728 the example in parentheses someplace.
9729 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9730 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9731 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9735 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9745 Now we will add verse.
9746 \begin_inset Newline newline
9749 It will get much worse.
9750 \begin_inset Newline newline
9760 arg "depth-increment"
9771 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9772 \begin_inset Newline newline
9775 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9776 \begin_inset Newline newline
9782 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9795 \begin_layout Standard
9796 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9802 \begin_layout Standard
9804 \begin_inset Tabular
9805 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9806 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9897 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9907 arg "depth-increment"
9913 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 \begin_inset Newline newline
9927 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 : level #1) This is another item.
9940 Note that selecting a
9944 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9945 3 times to put the table inside the
9953 \begin_layout Quotation
9954 We're now ending the
9958 list and changing to
9963 We're still at level #1.
9964 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9965 The next set of paragraphs is a
9966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9973 We will nest both the
9980 \begin_inset space ~
9985 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9989 for the letter body.
9993 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9996 to preserve the depth.
9997 Remember that you need to use
10000 arg "newline-insert newline"
10003 to create multiple lines inside the
10010 \begin_inset space ~
10020 \begin_layout Right Address
10022 \begin_inset Newline newline
10025 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10026 \begin_inset Newline newline
10032 \begin_layout Address
10034 \begin_inset space ~
10040 \begin_layout Quotation
10041 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10045 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10046 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10047 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10048 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10049 as soon as possible.
10050 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10053 \begin_layout Quotation
10054 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10055 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10056 with your order, along with payment.
10059 \begin_layout Quotation
10060 We thank you again for your patience.
10063 \begin_layout Address
10065 \begin_inset Newline newline
10072 \begin_layout Quotation
10073 That ends that example!
10076 \begin_layout Standard
10077 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10078 just a few keystrokes.
10079 We could have easily nested an
10100 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10103 \begin_layout Subsection
10105 \begin_inset Index idx
10108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10109 Nesting ! Separation
10115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10117 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10124 \begin_layout Standard
10125 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10127 For example you need two different enumerations:
10130 \begin_layout Enumerate
10135 \begin_layout Enumerate
10140 \begin_layout Enumerate
10144 \begin_layout --Separator--
10148 \begin_layout Itemize
10154 \begin_layout --Separator--
10158 \begin_layout Enumerate
10162 \begin_layout Enumerate
10166 \begin_layout Enumerate
10170 \begin_layout Standard
10171 To tell LyX that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the
10172 end of the last item and use the menu
10174 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10175 Start New Parent Environment
10178 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10179 If you use instead the menu
10181 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10182 Start New Environment
10184 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10187 \begin_layout Standard
10188 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10190 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227810
10192 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432227815
10198 arg "paragraph-break"
10202 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227824
10207 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar
10208 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432229616
10209 until you get an environment separator in the form of a small angled arrow.
10210 The only difference between this separator and the one you obtain by using
10211 the menu (a reddish line) is that it will also insert a blank line in the
10216 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432230601
10217 However, each kind of separator can be turned into the other kind by right-clic
10218 king it and choosing the wanted type through the context menu that opens.
10219 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10222 arg "paragraph-break"
10225 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10226 Thus, in a normal workflow, you can insert two consecutive environments
10227 of the same type by simply pressing
10230 arg "paragraph-break"
10233 until you get an environment separator, after which any other kind of environme
10234 nt can be inserted (even of the same type).
10237 \begin_layout Standard
10239 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432231566
10240 If you load documents produced with a previous version of LyX, you may notice
10241 that the angled-arrow separator may appear at the end of a line.
10242 In this case it is not used to separate environments but rather to assure
10243 that the same LaTeX output is obtained.
10244 Indeed, previous versions of LyX could insert spurious blank lines in the
10245 LaTeX output, which are now avoided.
10246 As those blank lines may affect vertical spacing, LyX takes care that you
10247 obtain the same results as before.
10248 You can safely remove the separators automatically inserted for this purpose
10249 if you like better the resulting vertical spacing.
10254 \begin_layout Section
10255 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10256 \begin_inset Index idx
10259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10268 \begin_layout Standard
10269 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10270 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10271 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10272 be broken at the end of a line.
10273 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10277 \begin_layout Subsection
10279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10281 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10286 \begin_inset Index idx
10289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10298 \begin_layout Standard
10299 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10300 line at that point.
10301 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10304 \begin_layout Quote
10305 Further documentation is given in section
10306 \begin_inset Newline newline
10310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10312 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10320 \begin_layout Standard
10321 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10336 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10345 A protected space is set with
10347 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10348 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10350 \begin_inset space ~
10358 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10364 \begin_layout Subsection
10366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10368 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10373 \begin_inset Index idx
10376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10377 Spacing ! Horizontal
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10388 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10389 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10393 The length units are listed in Appendix
10394 \begin_inset space ~
10398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10400 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10411 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10416 \begin_inset Index idx
10419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10420 Spaces ! Inter-word
10428 \begin_layout Standard
10429 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10430 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10431 at the ends of sentences.
10432 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10433 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10434 followed by a period; see section
10435 \begin_inset space ~
10439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10441 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10446 To insert a normal space, select
10448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10449 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10451 \begin_inset space ~
10459 arg "space-insert normal"
10465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10469 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10474 \begin_inset Index idx
10477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10495 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10504 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10505 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10506 inside abbreviations:
10509 \begin_layout Quote
10511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10515 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10518 \begin_layout Standard
10519 or between values and units.
10520 Compare for example this:
10521 \begin_inset Newline newline
10525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10529 \begin_inset Newline newline
10532 10 kg (normal space
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10538 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10539 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10541 \begin_inset space ~
10549 arg "space-insert thin"
10555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 You can also insert the following space types:
10563 \begin_layout Description
10565 \begin_inset space ~
10569 \begin_inset space ~
10572 space A line with a
10573 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10577 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10581 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10584 negative thin space between the arrows.
10587 \begin_layout Description
10589 \begin_inset space ~
10593 \begin_inset space ~
10596 space A line with a
10597 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10601 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10605 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10608 negative medium space between the arrows.
10611 \begin_layout Description
10613 \begin_inset space ~
10617 \begin_inset space ~
10620 space A line with a
10621 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10625 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10629 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10632 negative thick space between the arrows.
10635 \begin_layout Description
10637 \begin_inset space ~
10641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10645 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10649 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10653 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10657 \begin_inset space ~
10661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10664 em) space between the arrows.
10667 \begin_layout Description
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10677 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10681 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10685 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10696 em) space between the arrows.
10699 \begin_layout Description
10701 \begin_inset space ~
10705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10709 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10713 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10717 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10721 \begin_inset space ~
10725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10728 em) space between the arrows.
10731 \begin_layout Description
10733 \begin_inset space ~
10737 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10741 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10746 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10753 cm space between the arrows.
10756 \begin_layout Standard
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10764 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10768 lists the different space sizes.
10771 \begin_layout Standard
10772 \begin_inset Float table
10777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10783 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10787 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10797 \begin_inset Tabular
10798 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10799 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11074 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11076 \begin_inset Index idx
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11088 \begin_layout Standard
11089 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11090 in a uniform fashion.
11091 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11092 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11093 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11094 equally between themselves.
11097 \begin_layout Standard
11098 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11101 \begin_layout Quote
11103 This is on the left side
11104 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11107 This is on the right
11110 \begin_layout Quote
11113 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11117 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11123 \begin_layout Quote
11126 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11130 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11134 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11140 \begin_layout Standard
11141 That was an example in the
11147 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11151 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11155 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11158 is one in a standard paragraph.
11159 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11163 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11167 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11175 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11178 \begin_layout Standard
11180 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11190 \begin_layout Standard
11192 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11196 \begin_inset space ~
11202 \begin_layout Standard
11204 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11208 \begin_inset space ~
11214 \begin_layout Standard
11216 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11220 \begin_inset space ~
11226 \begin_layout Standard
11228 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11232 \begin_inset space ~
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11240 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11244 \begin_inset space ~
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11251 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11259 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11263 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11264 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11265 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11269 option in the space dialog.
11277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11281 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11286 \begin_inset Index idx
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11298 \begin_layout Standard
11299 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11300 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11303 \begin_layout Standard
11304 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11307 What is correct English?:
11308 \begin_inset Newline newline
11312 \begin_inset Newline newline
11316 \begin_inset space ~
11319 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11320 \begin_inset Newline newline
11324 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset Newline newline
11339 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11356 \begin_layout Standard
11358 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11363 \begin_inset space ~
11367 \begin_inset space ~
11371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11375 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11377 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11378 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11382 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11388 \begin_inset space ~
11392 \begin_inset space ~
11396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11399 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11408 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11409 That is why it is named
11410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11418 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11419 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11423 \begin_layout Subsection
11425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11427 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11432 \begin_inset Index idx
11435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11444 \begin_layout Standard
11445 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11448 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11450 \begin_inset space ~
11456 There you find the following sizes:
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11472 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11477 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11480 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11482 \begin_inset space ~
11488 \begin_inset Index idx
11491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11492 Document ! Settings
11497 for the paragraph separation.
11498 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset Index idx
11518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11524 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11525 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11530 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11531 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11540 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11549 s are described in section
11550 \begin_inset space ~
11554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11556 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11565 If there are several
11569 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11570 You can therefore use
11574 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11577 \begin_layout Standard
11582 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11583 \begin_inset space ~
11587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11589 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11607 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11608 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11620 \begin_layout Subsection
11621 Paragraph Alignment
11622 \begin_inset Index idx
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 Paragraph ! Alignment
11634 \begin_layout Standard
11635 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11637 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11640 dialog (toolbar button
11643 arg "layout-paragraph"
11647 There are five possibilities:
11650 \begin_layout Itemize
11658 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11664 \begin_layout Itemize
11672 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11678 \begin_layout Itemize
11686 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11692 \begin_layout Itemize
11700 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11706 \begin_layout Itemize
11714 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11721 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11722 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11723 the left and right margins.
11724 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11727 \begin_layout Standard
11729 This paragraph is right aligned,
11732 \begin_layout Standard
11734 this one is centered,
11737 \begin_layout Standard
11739 this one is left aligned.
11742 \begin_layout Subsection
11744 \begin_inset Index idx
11747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11748 Page breaks ! Forced
11754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11756 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11763 \begin_layout Standard
11764 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11765 can force a page break where you want one.
11766 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11767 Only if you use a lot of
11771 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11775 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11776 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11780 have to change the page breaking.
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11784 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11786 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11788 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11789 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11797 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11799 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11800 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11802 \begin_inset space ~
11807 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11809 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11810 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11813 \begin_layout Standard
11814 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11815 at the top of a page.
11816 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11817 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11818 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11819 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11823 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11827 to learn more about
11834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11838 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11843 \begin_inset Index idx
11846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 Page breaks ! Clear
11855 \begin_layout Standard
11856 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11857 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11858 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11859 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11860 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11866 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11867 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11869 \begin_inset space ~
11875 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11877 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11878 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11880 \begin_inset space ~
11884 \begin_inset space ~
11889 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11890 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11893 \begin_layout Subsection
11895 \begin_inset Index idx
11898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11907 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11914 \begin_layout Standard
11915 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11917 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11919 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11920 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11922 \begin_inset space ~
11926 \begin_inset space ~
11934 arg "newline-insert newline"
11938 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11940 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11941 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11943 \begin_inset space ~
11947 \begin_inset space ~
11955 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11958 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11960 This is useful to avoid
11961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11968 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11971 \begin_layout Standard
11972 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11973 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11974 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11975 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11976 \begin_inset space ~
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11982 reference "sec:Quote"
11987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11989 reference "sec:Verse"
11994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11996 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12003 \begin_layout Subsection
12005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12007 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
12012 \begin_inset Index idx
12015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12026 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12041 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12042 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12044 \begin_inset space ~
12049 you can insert horizontal lines.
12050 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12051 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12052 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12057 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12068 \begin_layout Section
12069 Characters and Symbols
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12074 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12075 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12083 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12087 for information on how this is done.
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12091 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12096 dialog via the menu
12098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12099 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12105 \begin_layout Standard
12106 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12114 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12115 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12116 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12124 \begin_layout Section
12125 Fonts and Text Styles
12126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12128 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12135 \begin_layout Subsection
12137 \begin_inset Index idx
12140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12149 \begin_layout Standard
12150 There are two types of fonts:
12153 \begin_layout Description
12155 \begin_inset space ~
12159 \begin_inset Index idx
12162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12168 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12173 characters) in the font.
12174 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12175 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12176 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12177 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12178 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12179 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12180 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12181 \begin_inset Newline newline
12184 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12185 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12186 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12187 sizes than at small ones.
12188 \begin_inset Newline newline
12202 \begin_inset space ~
12210 \begin_layout Description
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12216 \begin_inset Index idx
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12225 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12226 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12227 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12228 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12229 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12230 image manipulation program.
12231 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12232 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12233 \begin_inset space ~
12236 pixels high up to 34
12237 \begin_inset space ~
12240 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12241 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12242 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12244 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12245 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12246 \begin_inset Newline newline
12249 Bitmap fonts are named
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12257 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12260 \begin_layout Standard
12261 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12262 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12263 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12264 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12265 use scalable fonts.
12268 \begin_layout Standard
12269 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12272 \begin_layout Standard
12273 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12274 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12275 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12276 font to emphasize text, you use an
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12286 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12290 \begin_layout Subsection
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12294 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12302 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12303 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12304 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12306 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12307 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12308 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12309 to a word processor.
12310 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12311 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12312 across different machines.
12313 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12314 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12316 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12318 \begin_inset space ~
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12324 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12329 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12330 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12333 \begin_layout Standard
12334 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12335 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12337 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12338 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12339 that is installed on your system.
12340 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12343 \begin_layout Standard
12344 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12353 es; so you might have to experiment.
12361 \begin_layout Standard
12362 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12370 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12371 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12379 \begin_layout Subsection
12380 Document Font and Font size
12381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12383 name "sub:Document-Font"
12388 \begin_inset Index idx
12391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12398 \begin_inset Index idx
12401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 You can set the document fonts in the
12413 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12417 \begin_inset Index idx
12420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12421 Document ! Settings
12431 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12432 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12435 \begin_inset space ~
12444 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12446 \begin_inset space ~
12449 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12452 \begin_layout Standard
12459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12468 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12469 This requires that you use
12475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12514 as the output format, i.
12515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12519 \begin_inset space \space{}
12522 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12523 \begin_inset space ~
12527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12529 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12534 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12535 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12537 \begin_inset space ~
12540 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12541 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12542 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12544 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12547 \begin_layout Standard
12548 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12553 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12558 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12559 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12585 European Computer Modern
12588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12595 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12607 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12608 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12613 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12616 \begin_inset space ~
12621 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12627 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12628 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12631 \begin_layout Itemize
12635 \begin_inset space ~
12640 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12658 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12662 as the default font.
12663 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12664 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12681 One difference is improved kerning.
12689 \begin_layout Itemize
12693 \begin_inset space ~
12697 \begin_inset space ~
12702 fonts in (the rare) case that
12705 \begin_inset space ~
12710 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12725 Virtual means that it
12726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12737 -glyphs from other fonts.
12738 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12760 Loading the LaTeX-package
12765 \begin_inset Index idx
12768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12769 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12774 with the document preamble line
12775 \begin_inset Newline newline
12782 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12783 \begin_inset Newline newline
12788 will fix the guillemet problem.
12793 and that accented characters are not
12797 glyph, but built of
12801 characters, the accent and the letter.
12802 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12808 If you search for example for the French word
12809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12816 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12825 and not for the glyph
12826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12840 \begin_layout Itemize
12841 If you do not like the look of
12849 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12854 \begin_inset space ~
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12870 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12871 \begin_inset space ~
12874 serif and typewriter fonts,
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12886 \begin_inset space ~
12895 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12900 \begin_inset space \space{}
12908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12912 \begin_inset space \space{}
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12936 but you can also select your own.
12937 \begin_inset Newline newline
12940 The differences between roman,
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12952 fonts are explained in section
12953 \begin_inset space ~
12957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12959 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12964 \begin_inset Newline newline
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12975 was originally designed for newspapers.
12976 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12977 into the small newspaper columns.
12981 \begin_inset space ~
12986 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12990 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13003 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13008 depends on the class you are using.
13009 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13012 \begin_layout Standard
13013 Note that the font size is the
13018 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
13019 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13020 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13023 \begin_inset space ~
13029 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13030 \begin_inset space ~
13034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13036 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13043 \begin_layout Standard
13047 \begin_inset space ~
13052 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13057 serif or typewriter.
13062 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13072 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13075 \begin_layout Standard
13084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13093 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13099 \begin_inset Index idx
13102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13103 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13109 \begin_inset space ~
13113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13115 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13120 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13121 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13128 \begin_layout Standard
13129 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13131 Use Old Style Figures
13135 Use True Small Caps
13138 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13141 Use Old Style Figures
13143 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13145 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13153 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13157 Use True Small Caps
13159 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13160 of scaled capitals.
13161 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13162 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13170 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13171 a font to display the script characters.
13175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13176 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13181 \begin_inset Index idx
13184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13185 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13190 So this has no effect for the document language
13204 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13216 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13220 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13221 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13222 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13224 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13227 dialog, see section
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13234 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13246 \begin_layout Subsection
13250 \begin_layout Standard
13251 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13253 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13254 choose a math font in the dialog
13256 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13260 \begin_inset Index idx
13263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13264 Document ! Settings
13270 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13271 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13272 default font family
13273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13279 \begin_inset space ~
13285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13289 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13290 the document font is available.
13293 \begin_layout Standard
13294 Note that the math font will not be used for
13298 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13304 or by the insertion of the command
13311 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13312 \begin_inset space ~
13316 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13317 while the math characters do not.
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13322 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13333 \begin_inset space ~
13338 in the document font settings.
13341 \begin_layout Standard
13342 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13343 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13359 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13367 \begin_inset space ~
13373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13379 \begin_layout Subsection
13380 Using Different Character Styles
13381 \begin_inset Index idx
13384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13391 \begin_inset Index idx
13394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13403 \begin_layout Standard
13404 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13405 certain paragraph environments.
13406 LyX supports two character styles,
13415 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13419 \begin_layout Standard
13424 style, do one of the following:
13427 \begin_layout Itemize
13428 click on the toolbar button
13437 \begin_layout Itemize
13438 use the key binding
13447 \begin_layout Standard
13448 These commands are all toggles.
13453 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13457 One typically uses the
13461 style for proper names.
13463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13470 is the original author of LyX.
13471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 A more widely used character style is the
13483 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13490 \begin_layout Itemize
13491 clicking on the toolbar button
13500 \begin_layout Itemize
13501 using the keybindings
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13515 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13516 es use a different font.
13519 \begin_layout Standard
13520 We've been using the
13524 style all over the place in this document.
13525 Here's one more example:
13528 \begin_layout Quotation
13531 Do not overuse character styles!
13534 \begin_layout Standard
13535 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13536 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13537 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13538 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13542 \begin_layout Standard
13543 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13551 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13553 \begin_inset space ~
13556 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13562 arg "dialog-show character"
13568 \begin_layout Subsection
13569 Fine-Tuning with the
13574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13576 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13581 \begin_inset Index idx
13584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13593 \begin_layout Standard
13594 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13595 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13596 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13597 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13598 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13599 from ordinary dialog.
13602 \begin_layout Standard
13603 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13604 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13605 \begin_inset Newline newline
13608 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13609 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13613 To use custom character styles, open the
13615 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13617 \begin_inset space ~
13620 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13623 dialog or press the toolbar button
13626 arg "dialog-show character"
13630 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13631 font property that you can choose.
13632 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13635 \begin_inset space ~
13640 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13645 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13646 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13647 environments all at once.
13650 \begin_layout Standard
13651 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13654 \begin_inset space ~
13666 \begin_layout Labeling
13667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13681 The possible options are:
13685 \begin_layout Labeling
13686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13691 This is the Roman font family.
13692 Normally a serif font.
13693 It's also the default family.
13703 \begin_layout Labeling
13704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13708 \begin_inset space ~
13715 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13727 \begin_layout Labeling
13728 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13735 This is the Typewriter font family.
13741 arg "font-typewriter"
13750 \begin_layout Labeling
13751 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13756 This corresponds to the print weight.
13761 \begin_layout Labeling
13762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13767 This is the Medium font series.
13768 It's also the default series.
13771 \begin_layout Labeling
13772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13779 This is the Bold font series.
13792 \begin_layout Labeling
13793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 As the name implies.
13803 \begin_layout Labeling
13804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13809 This is the Upright font shape.
13810 It's also the default shape.
13813 \begin_layout Labeling
13814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13828 s the Italic font shape
13834 \begin_layout Labeling
13835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13842 This is the Slanted font shape
13844 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13847 \begin_layout Labeling
13848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13852 \begin_inset space ~
13859 This is the Small caps font shape
13866 \begin_layout Labeling
13867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13872 Alters the text color.
13873 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13877 \begin_inset space ~
13882 , which means that the document default color set in
13884 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13885 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13891 \begin_inset space ~
13896 is used, you can choose between
13929 \begin_inset Index idx
13932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13941 \begin_layout Labeling
13942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13947 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13948 the language of the document.
13949 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13951 \begin_inset Newline newline
13954 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13955 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13956 When using the spell checking (see section
13957 \begin_inset space ~
13961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13963 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13967 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13970 \begin_layout Labeling
13971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 Alters the size of the font.
13977 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13978 proportional to the document font size.
13979 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13980 what you want to do.
13985 \begin_layout Labeling
13986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14007 arg "font-size tiny"
14013 \begin_layout Labeling
14014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14035 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14063 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14069 \begin_layout Labeling
14070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 arg "font-size small"
14097 \begin_layout Labeling
14098 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14112 It's also the default size.
14116 arg "font-size normal"
14122 \begin_layout Labeling
14123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14144 arg "font-size large"
14150 \begin_layout Labeling
14151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14172 arg "font-size larger"
14178 \begin_layout Labeling
14179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14200 arg "font-size largest"
14206 \begin_layout Labeling
14207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14228 arg "font-size huge"
14234 \begin_layout Labeling
14235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14256 arg "font-size giant"
14262 \begin_layout Labeling
14263 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14268 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14288 arg "font-size increase"
14294 \begin_layout Labeling
14295 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14300 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14320 arg "font-size decrease"
14327 \begin_layout Standard
14332 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14333 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14334 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14335 — use those instead.
14336 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14339 \begin_layout Labeling
14340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14345 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14350 \begin_layout Labeling
14351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14358 This is text with emphasize on
14361 This might seem like the same as
14365 , but it is actually a bit different.
14371 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14373 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14376 \begin_layout Labeling
14377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14384 This is text with Underbar on.
14390 arg "font-underline"
14396 \begin_inset Newline newline
14401 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14402 when you could not change fonts.
14403 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14404 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14408 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14411 \begin_layout Labeling
14412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset space ~
14423 This is text with Double underbar on.
14429 arg "font-underunderline"
14433 \begin_inset Newline newline
14436 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14437 about double underbar.
14440 \begin_layout Labeling
14441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14445 \begin_inset space ~
14452 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14458 arg "font-underwave"
14462 \begin_inset Newline newline
14465 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14466 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14469 \begin_layout Labeling
14470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14477 This is text with Strikeout on.
14483 arg "font-strikeout"
14487 \begin_inset Newline newline
14490 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14491 changed in the meantime.
14494 \begin_layout Labeling
14495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14502 This is text with Noun on.
14509 , this is a logical attribute.
14510 Normally it's equivalent to
14513 \begin_inset space ~
14522 \begin_layout Standard
14523 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14524 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14526 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14528 \begin_inset space ~
14531 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14537 arg "dialog-show character"
14540 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14541 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14544 arg "textstyle-apply"
14548 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14553 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14560 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14561 (suppose you just set the shape to
14562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14580 \begin_inset space ~
14592 \begin_layout Standard
14593 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14601 \begin_inset space ~
14613 \begin_layout Itemize
14619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14644 \begin_inset Newline newline
14648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14662 \begin_inset Note Note
14665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14666 For more on phantoms see section
14667 \begin_inset space ~
14671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14673 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14689 \begin_layout Itemize
14694 fonts use characters with serifs.
14695 These are the small
14696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14703 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14704 The following example shows the difference:
14705 \begin_inset Newline newline
14709 \begin_inset Newline newline
14714 text without serifs
14717 \begin_inset Newline newline
14720 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14721 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14728 \begin_layout Itemize
14733 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14734 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14735 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14738 \begin_layout Standard
14739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14746 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14747 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14750 \begin_inset space ~
14755 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14756 the property to be removed.
14757 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14758 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14759 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14777 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14778 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14786 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14790 \begin_inset space ~
14795 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 If you, for example, set
14807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14825 \begin_inset space ~
14830 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14839 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14842 \begin_layout Standard
14843 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14844 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14847 \begin_layout Section
14848 Printing and Previewing
14851 \begin_layout Subsection
14855 \begin_layout Standard
14856 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14857 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14858 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14859 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14860 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14862 Additional Features
14867 \begin_layout Standard
14868 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14869 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14870 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14871 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14872 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14873 This happens in two stages:
14876 \begin_layout Enumerate
14877 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14878 generating a file with the extension,
14879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 \begin_layout Enumerate
14894 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14898 file to produce printable output.
14901 \begin_layout Subsection
14902 Output file formats
14903 \begin_inset Index idx
14906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14915 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14923 Simple text (ASCII)
14924 \begin_inset Index idx
14927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14928 File formats ! ASCII
14936 \begin_layout Standard
14937 This file type has the extension
14938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14954 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14961 \begin_layout Standard
14962 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14964 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14965 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14967 \begin_inset space ~
14973 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14974 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14975 \begin_inset space ~
14979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14981 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14986 If your document includes such material, use
14988 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14989 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14991 \begin_inset space ~
14995 \begin_inset space ~
14999 \begin_inset space ~
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15011 \begin_inset space ~
15017 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15018 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15023 \begin_inset Index idx
15026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15027 File formats ! LaTeX
15035 \begin_layout Standard
15036 This file type has the extension
15037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15048 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15050 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15051 it manually with console commands.
15052 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15053 you view or export your document.
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15059 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15060 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15075 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15076 \begin_inset space ~
15080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15082 reference "sub:Export"
15089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15091 \begin_inset Index idx
15094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15103 \begin_layout Standard
15104 This file type has the extension
15105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15125 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15126 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15127 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15131 \begin_layout Standard
15132 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15133 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15134 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15135 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15136 when you view the DVI.
15137 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15140 \begin_layout Standard
15141 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15143 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15144 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15149 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15150 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15152 \begin_inset space ~
15159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15169 The latter option uses the program
15178 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15179 font access (see section
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15186 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15191 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15192 standard TeX processor.
15195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15197 \begin_inset Index idx
15200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15201 File formats ! PostScript
15209 \begin_layout Standard
15210 This file type has the extension
15211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15223 PostScript was developed by the company
15227 as a printer language.
15228 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15230 PostScript can be seen as a
15231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 programming language
15235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15238 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15243 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15249 \begin_inset Index idx
15252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15253 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15263 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15266 \begin_layout Standard
15267 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15271 Encapsulated PostScript
15272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15275 (EPS, file extension
15276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15288 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15289 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15290 If, for example, you have 50
15291 \begin_inset space ~
15294 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15295 \begin_inset space ~
15298 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15299 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15300 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15301 EPS to avoid this problem.
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15307 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15308 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15316 \begin_inset Index idx
15319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15326 \begin_inset Index idx
15329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15338 \begin_layout Standard
15339 This file type has the extension
15340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15356 Portable Document Format
15357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15364 was derived from PostScript.
15365 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15374 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15375 looks exactly the same.
15378 \begin_layout Standard
15379 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15383 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15387 (JPG, file extension
15388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15415 Portable Network Graphics
15416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15419 (PNG, file extension
15420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15432 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15433 background to one of these formats.
15434 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15435 will slow down your workflow.
15436 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15439 \begin_layout Standard
15440 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15442 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15448 \begin_layout Description
15450 \begin_inset space ~
15453 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15457 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15460 \begin_layout Description
15462 \begin_inset space ~
15469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15476 X) This uses the program
15480 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15485 is a new engine, derived from
15489 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15490 access (see section
15491 \begin_inset space ~
15495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15497 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15502 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15503 standard TeX processor.
15506 \begin_layout Description
15508 \begin_inset space ~
15515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15522 X) This uses the program
15526 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15531 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15532 font access (see section
15533 \begin_inset space ~
15537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15539 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15544 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15545 vertically written Japanese.
15548 \begin_layout Description
15550 \begin_inset space ~
15553 (cropped) This is the same as
15556 \begin_inset space ~
15561 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15562 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15563 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15566 \begin_layout Description
15568 \begin_inset space ~
15571 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15575 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15579 \begin_layout Description
15581 \begin_inset space ~
15584 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15588 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15589 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15593 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15594 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15597 \begin_layout Standard
15601 \begin_inset space ~
15610 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15611 works without problems.
15612 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15613 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15617 \begin_inset space ~
15624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15636 \begin_inset space ~
15643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15652 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15662 \begin_inset Index idx
15665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 FileFormats ! XHTML
15672 \begin_inset Index idx
15675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15684 \begin_layout Standard
15685 This file type has the extension
15686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15698 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15699 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15700 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15701 suitable for the purpose.
15702 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15704 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15705 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15708 between different formats, which are described in section
15710 Math Output in XHTML
15715 \begin_inset space ~
15723 \begin_layout Standard
15724 XHTML output remains
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15732 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15735 LyX and the World Wide Web
15739 Additional Features
15741 manual, for more information.
15744 \begin_layout Standard
15745 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15747 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15748 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15754 \begin_layout Subsection
15756 \begin_inset Index idx
15759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15768 \begin_layout Standard
15769 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15770 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15779 or use the toolbar button
15786 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15787 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15794 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15798 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15806 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15811 Further output formats can be selected via
15813 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15814 View (Other Formats)
15816 or the toolbar button
15817 \begin_inset Graphics
15818 filename ../images/view-others.png
15820 groupId toolbarbuttons
15827 \begin_layout Standard
15828 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15829 viewer window using the menu
15831 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15836 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15837 Update (Other Formats)
15842 \begin_layout Standard
15843 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15845 To have a real output, export your document.
15848 \begin_layout Subsection
15849 Printing the File from within LyX
15850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15852 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15859 \begin_layout Standard
15860 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15861 it directly from within LyX.
15862 To print a file, select the menu
15864 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15870 arg "dialog-show print"
15873 ) or click on the toolbar button
15876 arg "dialog-show print"
15880 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15881 This file is then processed by the program
15885 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15890 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15893 \begin_layout Standard
15894 You can set the following print parameters in the
15897 \begin_inset space ~
15905 \begin_layout Labeling
15906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15911 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15916 Note that this printer name is for the program
15925 has to be configured for this printer name.
15926 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15927 \begin_inset space ~
15931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15933 reference "sub:Printer"
15942 The printer should understand PostScript.
15945 \begin_layout Labeling
15946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15951 The name of a file to print to.
15952 The output will be a PostScript file.
15953 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15957 \begin_layout Standard
15958 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15959 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15960 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15961 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15962 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15963 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15964 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15967 \begin_layout Section
15968 A few Words about Typography
15969 \begin_inset Index idx
15972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15981 \begin_layout Subsection
15982 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15983 \begin_inset Index idx
15986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15993 \begin_inset Index idx
15996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16005 \begin_layout Standard
16007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16018 character comes in four lengths: the
16030 , and the minus sign:
16031 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16037 \begin_layout Standard
16038 \begin_inset Tabular
16039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16040 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16041 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16044 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16073 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16113 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16138 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16140 \begin_inset space ~
16143 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16150 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16175 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16177 \begin_inset space ~
16180 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16241 \begin_layout Standard
16242 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16254 character multiple times in a row.
16255 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16256 the final output, but not in LyX.
16258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16288 \begin_layout Standard
16289 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16290 math mode and has a length of its own.
16291 Here are some examples:
16294 \begin_layout Enumerate
16295 line- and page-breaks
16296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16306 \begin_layout Enumerate
16308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16318 \begin_layout Enumerate
16319 Oh — there's a dash.
16320 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16330 \begin_layout Enumerate
16331 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16335 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16345 \begin_layout Subsection
16347 \begin_inset Index idx
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16359 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16366 \begin_layout Standard
16367 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16368 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16373 \begin_inset Index idx
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16377 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16382 following the rules of the document language.
16385 \begin_layout Standard
16386 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16391 font and with unusual constructs, like
16392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16400 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16402 This is done with the menu
16404 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16405 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16407 \begin_inset space ~
16413 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16414 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16417 \begin_layout Standard
16418 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16419 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16429 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 as a hyphenation possibility.
16438 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16439 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16440 as described in section
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 Prevent Hyphenation
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16451 \begin_inset space ~
16459 \begin_layout Subsection
16461 \begin_inset Index idx
16464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16474 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16477 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16484 \begin_layout Standard
16485 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16486 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16487 LaTeX then adds the
16488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16491 appropriate amount of space.
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16497 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16498 gets after another word.
16501 \begin_layout Standard
16502 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16503 not work in all cases.
16505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16516 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16517 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16521 Here are some examples of
16525 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16528 \begin_layout Itemize
16533 \begin_layout Itemize
16538 \begin_layout Standard
16539 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16542 \begin_layout Itemize
16544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16548 this is too much space!
16551 \begin_layout Itemize
16556 \begin_layout Standard
16557 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16560 \begin_layout Standard
16561 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16564 \begin_layout Enumerate
16568 \begin_inset space ~
16573 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16580 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16585 \begin_inset Index idx
16588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16589 Spaces ! inter-word
16597 \begin_layout Enumerate
16601 \begin_inset space ~
16606 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16613 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16618 \begin_inset Index idx
16621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16630 \begin_layout Enumerate
16634 \begin_inset space ~
16638 \begin_inset space ~
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16649 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16651 \begin_inset space ~
16656 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16657 This function is also bound to
16660 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16666 \begin_layout Standard
16667 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16670 \begin_layout Itemize
16672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16676 \begin_inset space \space{}
16679 this is too much space!
16682 \begin_layout Itemize
16683 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16687 \begin_layout Standard
16688 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16689 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16690 will take care of this.
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16698 \begin_inset space ~
16703 feature described in the section
16709 Additional Features
16714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16716 \begin_inset Index idx
16719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16720 Typography ! Quotes
16726 \begin_inset Index idx
16729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16760 \begin_layout Standard
16761 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16762 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16763 and use a closing quote at the end.
16765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16773 The keyboard character,
16777 , generates this automatically.
16780 \begin_layout Standard
16781 You can specify what character the
16785 key produces using the submenu
16791 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16795 \begin_inset Index idx
16798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16799 Document ! Settings
16809 There are six choices:
16812 \begin_layout Labeling
16813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16836 \begin_layout Labeling
16837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16840 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16844 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16850 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16860 \begin_layout Labeling
16861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16864 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16868 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16874 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16878 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16884 \begin_layout Labeling
16885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16888 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16892 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16898 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16908 \begin_layout Labeling
16909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16912 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16916 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16922 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16926 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16932 \begin_layout Labeling
16933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16936 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16940 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16946 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16950 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16956 \begin_layout Standard
16957 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16960 arg "quote-insert single"
16966 \begin_layout Subsection
16968 \begin_inset Index idx
16971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16972 Typography ! Ligatures
16978 \begin_inset Index idx
16981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17012 name "sub:Ligatures"
17019 \begin_layout Standard
17020 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17021 print them as single characters.
17022 These groups are known as
17027 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
17029 Here are the standard ligatures:
17032 \begin_layout Itemize
17036 \begin_layout Itemize
17040 \begin_layout Itemize
17044 \begin_layout Itemize
17048 \begin_layout Itemize
17052 \begin_layout Standard
17053 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17056 \begin_layout Standard
17057 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17058 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17066 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17082 To break a ligature, use
17084 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17085 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17087 \begin_inset space ~
17094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17105 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17122 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17130 \begin_layout Subsection
17132 \begin_inset Index idx
17135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17144 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17151 \begin_layout Standard
17152 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17153 characters in different sizes and positions.
17154 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17155 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17175 \begin_inset Note Note
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17180 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17185 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17186 following proper names:
17189 \begin_layout Description
17190 LyX The name of the game, write
17191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17212 \begin_layout Description
17213 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17235 \begin_layout Description
17236 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17258 \begin_layout Description
17259 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17281 \begin_layout Standard
17282 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17296 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17297 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17300 : The actual version is
17301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17308 , the previous one was
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_layout Standard
17320 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17321 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17322 In LyX this will look like
17323 \begin_inset Graphics
17324 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17330 \begin_inset Newline newline
17333 For more about TeX Code, see section
17334 \begin_inset space ~
17338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17340 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17347 \begin_layout Subsection
17349 \begin_inset Index idx
17352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17361 \begin_layout Standard
17362 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17363 space between two words.
17364 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17374 for units use the menu
17376 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17377 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17387 arg "space-insert thin"
17393 \begin_layout Standard
17394 Here is an example to show the differences:
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 \begin_inset Tabular
17399 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17400 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17401 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17402 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17409 \begin_inset space ~
17413 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17425 space between number and unit
17432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17441 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 half space between number and unit
17466 \begin_layout Subsection
17468 \begin_inset Index idx
17471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17472 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17480 \begin_layout Standard
17481 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17483 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17484 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17485 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17486 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17487 These bits of text became known as
17498 \begin_layout Standard
17499 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17500 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17501 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17502 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17503 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17504 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17505 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17506 \begin_inset Newline newline
17514 \begin_inset Newline newline
17522 \begin_inset Newline newline
17525 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17526 Some LaTeX books (such as
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17533 key "latexcompanion"
17538 \begin_inset space ~
17542 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17548 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17552 \begin_layout Chapter
17553 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17556 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17563 \begin_layout Standard
17564 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17567 \begin_inset space ~
17573 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17576 \begin_layout Section
17578 \begin_inset Index idx
17581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17597 \begin_layout Standard
17598 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17601 \begin_layout Description
17603 \begin_inset space ~
17606 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17607 \begin_inset Newline newline
17611 \begin_inset Note Note
17614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17615 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17623 \begin_layout Description
17624 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17625 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17627 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17628 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17641 \begin_inset space ~
17647 \begin_inset Newline newline
17651 \begin_inset Note Comment
17654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17655 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17663 \begin_layout Description
17665 \begin_inset space ~
17668 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17669 set in the document settings under
17671 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17673 \begin_inset space ~
17679 \begin_inset Newline newline
17683 \begin_inset Newline newline
17687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17696 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17697 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17702 of a comment that appears in the output.
17708 \begin_inset Newline newline
17712 \begin_inset Newline newline
17715 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17718 \begin_layout Standard
17719 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17727 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17731 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17734 \begin_layout Section
17736 \begin_inset Index idx
17739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17748 name "sec:Footnotes"
17755 \begin_layout Standard
17756 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17759 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17762 or the toolbar button
17765 arg "footnote-insert"
17777 \begin_inset Graphics
17778 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17787 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17816 label, the box will
17820 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17821 Clicking on the box label again will close
17834 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17835 and click on the footnote
17850 \begin_layout Standard
17851 Here is an example footnote:
17859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17860 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17868 \begin_layout Standard
17869 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17870 position where the footnote box is placed.
17871 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17872 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17873 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17874 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17879 ey are described in the
17882 \begin_inset space ~
17890 \begin_layout Section
17892 \begin_inset Index idx
17895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17904 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17912 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17913 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17915 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17917 \begin_inset space ~
17922 or the toolbar button
17925 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17951 appearing within your text.
17952 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17966 \begin_inset Marginal
17969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17971 This is a marginal note.
17979 \begin_layout Standard
17980 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17981 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17982 pages, right on odd pages.
17985 \begin_layout Standard
17986 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17989 \begin_inset space ~
17997 \begin_inset space ~
18005 \begin_layout Section
18006 Graphics and Images
18007 \begin_inset Index idx
18010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18017 \begin_inset Index idx
18020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18029 name "sec:Graphics"
18036 \begin_layout Standard
18037 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18038 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18041 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18046 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18050 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18053 \begin_layout Standard
18054 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18059 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18060 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18062 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18069 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18076 \begin_layout Standard
18081 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18082 of the image in the output.
18083 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18104 \begin_inset space ~
18108 \begin_inset space ~
18113 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18114 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18122 \begin_layout Standard
18129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18137 \begin_inset space ~
18141 \begin_inset space ~
18148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18157 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18158 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18162 \begin_inset space ~
18167 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18168 with the image size is printed.
18172 \begin_inset space ~
18176 \begin_inset space ~
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18185 is explained in the
18188 \begin_inset space ~
18200 \begin_layout Standard
18201 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18202 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18204 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18207 \begin_layout Standard
18209 \begin_inset Graphics
18210 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18218 \begin_layout Standard
18219 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18220 the image into a float, see section
18221 \begin_inset space ~
18225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18227 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18234 \begin_layout Subsection
18236 \begin_inset Index idx
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18248 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18255 \begin_layout Standard
18256 You can insert images in any known file format.
18257 But as we explained in section
18258 \begin_inset space ~
18262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18264 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18268 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18269 LyX therefore uses the program
18273 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18274 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18275 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18276 \begin_inset space ~
18280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18282 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18289 \begin_layout Standard
18290 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18293 \begin_layout Description
18295 \begin_inset space ~
18298 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18299 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18300 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18304 Graphics Interchange Format
18305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18308 (GIF, file extension
18309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18321 \begin_inset Index idx
18324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18356 Portable Network Graphics
18357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18360 (PNG, file extension
18361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18373 \begin_inset Index idx
18376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 (JPG, file extension
18413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18437 \begin_inset Index idx
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18471 \begin_layout Description
18473 \begin_inset space ~
18476 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18478 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18479 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18480 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18481 \begin_inset Newline newline
18484 Scalable image formats can be
18485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18488 Scalable Vector Graphics
18489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18492 (SVG, file extension
18493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18505 \begin_inset Index idx
18508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18540 Encapsulated PostScript
18541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 (EPS, file extension
18545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18557 \begin_inset Index idx
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18592 Portable Document Format
18593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18596 (PDF, file extension
18597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18609 \begin_inset Index idx
18612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18627 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18628 result will not be scalable.
18629 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18635 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18643 \begin_layout Standard
18644 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18651 \begin_layout Subsection
18652 Grouping of Image Settings
18653 \begin_inset Index idx
18656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18657 Images ! Settings grouping
18665 \begin_layout Standard
18666 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18668 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18669 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18671 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18672 need to manually change each of them.
18676 \begin_layout Standard
18677 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18680 \begin_inset space ~
18684 \begin_inset space ~
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 \begin_inset space ~
18711 \begin_inset space ~
18718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18729 and checking the name of the desired group.
18732 \begin_layout Section
18734 \begin_inset Index idx
18737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18753 \begin_layout Standard
18754 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18757 arg "tabular-insert"
18762 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18766 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18767 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18768 from the rest of the table.
18769 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18770 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18772 Here is an example table:
18775 \begin_layout Standard
18777 \begin_inset Tabular
18778 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18779 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18780 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18781 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18783 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18983 \begin_layout Subsection
18987 \begin_layout Standard
18988 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18991 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18995 This brings up the table dialog.
18996 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18997 cursor is placed currently.
18998 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18999 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19000 done on all of your selection.
19003 \begin_layout Standard
19004 In addition to the table dialog, the
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19012 helps you in setting table properties.
19013 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19016 \begin_layout Standard
19020 \begin_inset space ~
19025 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19026 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19027 current cell respectively.
19028 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19030 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19031 of text, see section
19032 \begin_inset space ~
19036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19038 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19046 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19047 using the check box
19056 This will merge the cells to
19060 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19061 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19062 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19063 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19064 in the last row without the upper border:
19067 \begin_layout Standard
19069 \begin_inset Tabular
19070 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19071 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19073 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19086 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19095 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 \begin_layout Standard
19207 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19208 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19209 explained in the chapter
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19222 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19223 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19226 \begin_layout Standard
19227 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 Most DVI-viewers are
19239 able to display rotations.
19247 \begin_layout Standard
19252 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19257 adds lines for all cell borders.
19260 \begin_layout Subsection
19262 \begin_inset Index idx
19265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 Tables ! Longtables
19272 \begin_inset Index idx
19275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19284 \begin_layout Standard
19285 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19288 \begin_inset space ~
19292 \begin_inset space ~
19301 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19302 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19305 \begin_layout Description
19310 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19311 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19312 except for the first page, if
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_layout Description
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19332 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19333 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19336 \begin_layout Description
19341 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19342 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19343 except for the last page, if
19346 \begin_inset space ~
19354 \begin_layout Description
19358 \begin_inset space ~
19363 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19364 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19367 \begin_layout Description
19368 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19369 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19371 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19375 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19378 \begin_inset space ~
19386 \begin_layout Standard
19387 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19388 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19389 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19395 In this context, first means first in this order:
19398 \begin_inset space ~
19410 \begin_inset space ~
19415 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19418 \begin_layout Standard
19420 \begin_inset Tabular
19421 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19422 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19423 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19424 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19425 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19426 <row endfirsthead="true">
19427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19438 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19447 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <row endfirsthead="true">
19458 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19469 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <row endhead="true">
19491 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <row endhead="true">
19522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <row endfoot="true">
19555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19606 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20565 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21351 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <row endlastfoot="true">
21537 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 \begin_layout Subsection
21576 \begin_inset Index idx
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21588 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21595 \begin_layout Standard
21596 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21597 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21598 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21599 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21603 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21606 \begin_layout Standard
21607 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21608 for the column in the table dialog.
21609 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21610 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21614 \begin_layout Standard
21616 \begin_inset Tabular
21617 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21618 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21620 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21641 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 This is longer now.
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21823 This is longer now.
21828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21855 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21856 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21862 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21868 Selection with the mouse or with
21872 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21873 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21874 the selection from outside the table.
21877 \begin_layout Section
21879 \begin_inset Index idx
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21898 \begin_layout Subsection
21902 \begin_layout Standard
21903 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21904 have a fixed location.
21906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21913 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21921 \begin_inset space ~
21926 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21927 too many notes on the current page.
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21931 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21932 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21933 and pages without text.
21934 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21935 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21936 Floats are therefore numbered.
21937 Referencing is described in section
21938 \begin_inset space ~
21942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21944 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21951 \begin_layout Standard
21952 To insert a float, use the menu
21954 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21958 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21959 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21961 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21962 \begin_inset Index idx
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21972 paragraph within the float.
21973 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21974 by left-clicking on the box label.
21975 A closed float box looks like this:
21976 \begin_inset Graphics
21977 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21982 – a gray button with a red label.
21985 \begin_layout Standard
21986 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21987 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21990 \begin_layout Subsection
21992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21994 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21999 \begin_inset Index idx
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 Floats ! Figure floats
22011 \begin_layout Standard
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22019 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22023 was created using the menu
22025 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22026 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22032 arg "float-insert figure"
22036 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22039 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22045 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22049 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22050 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22052 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22054 \begin_inset space ~
22062 arg "layout-paragraph"
22068 \begin_layout Standard
22069 \begin_inset Float figure
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 \begin_inset Graphics
22077 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22092 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22096 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22109 \begin_layout Standard
22110 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22111 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22113 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22122 ) and refer to it using the menu
22124 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22130 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22134 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22135 vague references like
22136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22143 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22153 For more about cross-references, see section
22154 \begin_inset space ~
22158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22160 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22167 \begin_layout Standard
22168 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22169 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22170 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22171 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22172 as described in section
22173 \begin_inset space ~
22177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22179 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22185 \begin_inset space ~
22189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22191 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22195 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22196 You can also set the images one below the other.
22198 \begin_inset space ~
22202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22204 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22211 reference "fig:Platypus"
22215 are the subfigures.
22218 \begin_layout Standard
22219 \begin_inset Float figure
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22229 \begin_inset Float figure
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22240 name "fig:Undefinable"
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22253 \begin_inset Graphics
22254 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22265 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22269 \begin_inset Float figure
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22280 name "fig:Platypus"
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 \begin_inset Graphics
22294 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22306 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22318 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22322 Two distorted images.
22335 \begin_layout Subsection
22337 \begin_inset Index idx
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 Floats ! Table floats
22349 \begin_layout Standard
22350 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22352 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22353 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22356 or the toolbar button
22359 arg "float-insert table"
22363 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22364 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22365 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22367 \begin_inset space ~
22371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22373 reference "tab:Table-float"
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22381 \begin_inset Float table
22386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22392 name "tab:Table-float"
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 \begin_inset Tabular
22407 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22408 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22538 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22562 \end{array}\right]$
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22604 \begin_layout Subsection
22606 \begin_inset Index idx
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 \begin_layout Standard
22619 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22620 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22621 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22623 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22631 \begin_inset space ~
22639 \begin_layout Section
22641 \begin_inset Index idx
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 \begin_layout Standard
22654 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22656 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22657 \begin_inset space \space{}
22664 \begin_layout Standard
22665 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22667 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22671 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22672 and its alignment within the page.
22675 \begin_layout Standard
22677 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22687 height_special "totalheight"
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 This is a minipage.
22694 The text is set in an italic style.
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22701 another formatting.
22709 \begin_layout Standard
22710 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22713 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22717 as described in section
22718 \begin_inset space ~
22722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22724 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22729 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22735 \begin_layout Standard
22736 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22746 height_special "totalheight"
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22751 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22761 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22771 height_special "totalheight"
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22776 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22784 \begin_layout Standard
22785 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22792 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22794 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22801 \begin_inset space ~
22809 \begin_layout Chapter
22810 Mathematical Formulas
22811 \begin_inset Index idx
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 \begin_inset Index idx
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22855 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22862 \begin_layout Standard
22863 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22868 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22871 \begin_layout Section
22873 \begin_inset Index idx
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 \begin_layout Standard
22886 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22899 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22901 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22902 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22903 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22905 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22911 \begin_layout Standard
22912 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22916 \begin_inset space ~
22921 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22924 \begin_layout Standard
22925 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22926 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22929 \begin_layout Standard
22930 This is a line with an inline formula
22931 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22937 \begin_layout Standard
22938 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22939 paragraph, like this one:
22940 \begin_inset Formula
22947 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22950 \begin_layout Standard
22951 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22952 For example, typing
22953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22966 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22967 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22971 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22974 \begin_inset space ~
22982 \begin_layout Subsection
22983 Navigating in Formulas
22984 \begin_inset Index idx
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 \begin_layout Standard
22997 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22998 achieved with the arrow keys.
22999 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23000 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23005 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23006 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23010 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23014 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23017 \end{array}\right]$
23025 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23030 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23031 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23034 \begin_layout Standard
23039 , printed in this document as
23040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23044 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23051 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23052 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23053 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23058 For example, if you want
23059 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23067 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23077 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23081 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23086 , since in the latter case only the
23089 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23094 will be under the square root sign:
23095 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23101 \begin_layout Standard
23102 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23104 \begin_inset Formula
23106 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23115 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23116 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23119 \begin_layout Subsection
23123 \begin_layout Standard
23124 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23125 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23129 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23130 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23131 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23132 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23133 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23136 \begin_layout Subsection
23137 Exponents and Subscripts
23138 \begin_inset Index idx
23141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 \begin_inset Index idx
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 \begin_layout Standard
23161 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23164 arg "math-superscript"
23170 arg "math-subscript"
23173 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23175 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23178 , type in a formula
23181 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23191 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23197 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23201 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23207 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23213 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23222 , you have to use an extra
23226 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23227 For example, if you want
23228 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23234 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23240 Subscripts are similar: To get
23241 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23247 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23255 \begin_layout Subsection
23257 \begin_inset Index idx
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 \begin_layout Standard
23270 Create a fraction either with the command
23276 or by using the icon
23279 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23285 \begin_inset space ~
23291 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23292 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23293 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23298 To move back up, press
23303 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23304 \begin_inset Formula
23306 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23309 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23317 \begin_layout Subsection
23319 \begin_inset Index idx
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23331 \begin_layout Standard
23332 Roots can be created using the
23335 \begin_inset space ~
23343 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23349 arg "math-insert \\root"
23371 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23377 always produces a square root.
23380 \begin_layout Subsection
23381 Operators with Limits
23382 \begin_inset Index idx
23385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23392 \begin_inset Index idx
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23404 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23411 \begin_layout Standard
23413 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23417 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23420 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23421 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23422 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23423 The sum operator will automatically place its
23424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23431 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23433 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23437 \begin_inset Formula
23439 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23444 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23448 \begin_layout Standard
23449 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23451 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23452 behind the operator and using the menu
23454 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23455 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23457 \begin_inset space ~
23461 \begin_inset space ~
23475 \begin_layout Standard
23476 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23485 \begin_inset Index idx
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 \begin_inset Formula
23497 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23502 which will place the
23503 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23515 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23516 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23522 \begin_layout Standard
23523 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23530 Have a look at section
23531 \begin_inset space ~
23535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23537 reference "sub:Functions"
23541 for an explanation of function macros.
23544 \begin_layout Subsection
23546 \begin_inset Index idx
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 \begin_layout Standard
23559 Most math symbols can be found in the
23562 \begin_inset space ~
23567 under one of several categories; including
23584 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23588 \begin_layout Standard
23589 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23590 you don't have to use the
23593 \begin_inset space ~
23598 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23599 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23602 \begin_layout Subsection
23604 \begin_inset Index idx
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23617 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23622 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23628 \begin_inset space ~
23636 arg "math-insert \\space"
23640 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23641 For example, the sequence
23646 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23650 \begin_inset Graphics
23651 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23656 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23657 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23658 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23659 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23661 Here are two examples:
23664 \begin_layout Standard
23674 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23680 \begin_layout Standard
23690 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23696 \begin_layout Subsection
23698 \begin_inset Index idx
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23710 name "sub:Functions"
23717 \begin_layout Standard
23721 \begin_inset space ~
23726 contains under the button
23729 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23732 a number of function macros, such as
23733 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23737 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23745 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23752 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23753 avoid confusions, because
23754 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23758 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23764 \begin_layout Standard
23765 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23767 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23771 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23777 \begin_layout Standard
23778 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23779 are placed, as described in section
23780 \begin_inset space ~
23784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23786 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23793 \begin_layout Subsection
23795 \begin_inset Index idx
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 \begin_layout Standard
23808 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23810 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23811 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23812 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23815 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23816 Our example is entered by typing
23821 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23828 \begin_inset space ~
23832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23834 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23838 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23841 \begin_layout Standard
23842 \begin_inset Float table
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23853 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23857 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 \begin_inset Tabular
23868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23869 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23872 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24454 \begin_layout Standard
24455 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24458 \begin_inset space ~
24466 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24469 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24473 \begin_layout Section
24474 Brackets and Delimiters
24475 \begin_inset Index idx
24478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24485 \begin_inset Index idx
24488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24497 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24504 \begin_layout Standard
24505 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24506 For some purposes, using just the keys
24511 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24512 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24513 toolbar delimiter icon
24516 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24520 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24521 \begin_inset Formula
24523 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24531 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24532 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24536 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24539 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24545 \begin_inset Formula
24547 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24555 \begin_layout Standard
24556 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24557 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24561 \begin_layout Standard
24562 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24563 left side and right side.
24564 If you use the option
24567 \begin_inset space ~
24572 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24573 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24574 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24579 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24582 \begin_layout Standard
24583 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24584 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24585 is to go inside the brackets.
24586 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24591 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24592 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24593 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24597 arg "math-delim ( )"
24603 \begin_layout Section
24604 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24605 \begin_inset Index idx
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 \begin_inset Index idx
24618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 \begin_inset Index idx
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24637 \begin_layout Standard
24638 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24641 \begin_inset space ~
24649 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24653 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24654 Here is an example:
24655 \begin_inset Formula
24657 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24666 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24667 \begin_inset space ~
24671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24673 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24678 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24679 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24680 This alignment is set in the box
24685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24733 for every column as default.
24734 For example, the sequence
24735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24746 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24747 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24748 corresponds to the relevant column.
24749 The result will look like this:
24750 \begin_inset Formula
24753 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24754 column & has & has\,right\\
24755 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24764 \begin_layout Standard
24765 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24768 arg "newline-insert newline"
24771 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24772 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24774 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24777 or the math toolbar.
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24781 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24782 It can be created with the menu
24784 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24785 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24787 \begin_inset space ~
24799 Here is an example:
24800 \begin_inset Formula
24814 \begin_layout Standard
24815 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24818 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24821 arg "newline-insert newline"
24825 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24830 arg "newline-insert newline"
24833 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24841 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24842 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24843 A new row is created by every further entry of
24846 arg "newline-insert newline"
24850 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24851 Here is an example:
24852 \begin_inset Formula
24854 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24855 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24860 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24861 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24862 \begin_inset Formula
24864 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24872 \begin_layout Standard
24873 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24880 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24881 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24884 reference "eq:asquared"
24889 The other types are described in section
24890 \begin_inset space ~
24894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24896 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24903 \begin_layout Section
24904 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24905 \begin_inset Index idx
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24909 Math ! Formula numbering
24915 \begin_inset Index idx
24918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24919 Math ! Referencing formulas
24925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24927 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24934 \begin_layout Standard
24935 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24937 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24938 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24940 \begin_inset space ~
24944 \begin_inset space ~
24952 arg "math-number-toggle"
24956 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24957 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24958 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24959 the document class.
24960 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24961 separated by a dot:
24962 \begin_inset Formula
24972 arg "math-number-toggle"
24975 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24976 You can only number displayed formulas.
24979 \begin_layout Standard
24980 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24982 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24983 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24985 \begin_inset space ~
24989 \begin_inset space ~
24997 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25000 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25001 \begin_inset Formula
25004 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25010 To number all lines use the shortcut
25013 arg "math-number-toggle"
25019 \begin_layout Standard
25020 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25023 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25024 A label is inserted with the menu
25026 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25035 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25036 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25037 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25049 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25050 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25051 We inserted in the following example the label
25052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25059 in the second line:
25060 \begin_inset Formula
25062 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25063 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25068 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25069 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25070 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25072 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25074 \begin_inset space ~
25082 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25086 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25087 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25088 as the formula number:
25091 \begin_layout Standard
25092 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25095 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25102 \begin_layout Standard
25103 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25104 \begin_inset space ~
25108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25110 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25115 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25123 \begin_layout Section
25124 User defined math macros
25125 \begin_inset Index idx
25128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 \begin_layout Standard
25138 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25139 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25140 Math macros are explained in section
25143 \begin_inset space ~
25155 \begin_layout Section
25159 \begin_layout Subsection
25161 \begin_inset Index idx
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 \begin_layout Standard
25174 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25175 To set a font in a formula, use the
25178 \begin_inset space ~
25186 arg "math-insert \\font"
25189 , or enter its command, listed in table
25190 \begin_inset space ~
25194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25196 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25203 \begin_layout Standard
25204 \begin_inset Float table
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25215 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25219 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 \begin_inset Tabular
25230 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25231 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25232 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25233 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25467 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25501 \begin_layout Standard
25502 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25510 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25528 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25533 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25534 space when you need a space in the box.
25535 Here is an example where
25536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25547 denotes the set of numbers:
25548 \begin_inset Formula
25550 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25560 You can, for example, put a character in
25569 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25573 \begin_inset Newline newline
25576 So it is better not to use this feature.
25579 \begin_layout Standard
25580 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25581 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25585 \begin_inset Newline newline
25588 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25594 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25595 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25601 \begin_layout Standard
25608 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25611 \begin_layout Standard
25612 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25614 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25615 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25617 \begin_inset space ~
25625 \begin_layout Subsection
25627 \begin_inset Index idx
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 \begin_layout Standard
25640 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25642 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25646 \begin_inset space ~
25650 \begin_inset space ~
25658 \begin_inset space ~
25666 arg "math-insert \\font"
25670 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25671 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25672 Here is an example:
25673 \begin_inset Formula
25676 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25677 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25686 \begin_layout Subsection
25688 \begin_inset Index idx
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25700 \begin_layout Standard
25701 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25702 automatically chosen in most situations.
25720 For most characters,
25728 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25729 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25734 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25735 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25737 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25740 arg "math-insert \\style"
25744 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25745 For example, you can set
25746 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25749 , which is normally in
25758 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25762 The four styles are used in the following example:
25765 \begin_layout Standard
25766 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25770 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25774 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25778 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25784 \begin_layout Standard
25785 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25786 is set in a particular size with the menu
25788 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25790 \begin_inset space ~
25795 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25796 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25797 will be adjusted to correspond.
25798 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25809 \begin_layout Standard
25813 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25819 \begin_layout Section
25821 \begin_inset Index idx
25824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25831 \begin_inset Index idx
25834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25843 \begin_layout Standard
25844 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25845 (AMS) that are in common use.
25848 \begin_layout Subsection
25849 Enabling AMS-Support
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25854 the document by selecting the checkbox
25857 \begin_inset space ~
25861 \begin_inset space ~
25865 \begin_inset space ~
25872 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25876 \begin_inset Index idx
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25880 Document ! Settings
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25894 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25895 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25898 \begin_layout Subsection
25900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25902 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25907 \begin_inset Index idx
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25911 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25919 \begin_layout Standard
25920 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25921 LyX allows you to choose between
25942 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25943 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25949 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25952 \begin_layout Chapter
25956 \begin_layout Section
25958 \begin_inset Index idx
25961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25970 name "sec:Cross-References"
25977 \begin_layout Standard
25978 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25979 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25981 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25982 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25983 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25986 \begin_layout Enumerate
25990 \begin_layout Enumerate
25991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25993 name "enu:Second-item"
26000 \begin_layout Enumerate
26004 \begin_layout Standard
26005 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26007 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26010 or by pressing the toolbar button
26017 A gray label box like this:
26018 \begin_inset Graphics
26019 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26024 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26025 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26060 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26061 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26078 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26080 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26083 or the toolbar button
26086 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26090 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26091 \begin_inset Graphics
26092 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26097 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26099 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26112 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 As an alternative to
26119 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26122 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26127 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26128 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26130 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26142 \begin_layout Standard
26143 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26144 \begin_inset space ~
26148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26150 reference "enu:Second-item"
26157 \begin_layout Standard
26158 It is recommended to use a protected space
26162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26163 described in section
26164 \begin_inset space ~
26168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26170 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26179 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26180 line breaks between them.
26183 \begin_layout Standard
26184 There are six formats of cross-references:
26187 \begin_layout Description
26188 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26191 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26198 \begin_layout Description
26199 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26200 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26212 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26219 \begin_layout Description
26220 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26221 \begin_inset space ~
26225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26226 LatexCommand pageref
26227 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26234 \begin_layout Description
26236 \begin_inset space ~
26240 \begin_inset space ~
26243 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26245 LatexCommand vpageref
26246 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26251 \begin_inset Newline newline
26254 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26255 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26256 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26257 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26258 it prints “on the next page”.
26259 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26262 \begin_layout Description
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26268 \begin_inset space ~
26272 \begin_inset space ~
26275 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26278 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26283 \begin_inset Newline newline
26286 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26292 ; otherwise it behaves like
26296 \begin_inset space ~
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26309 \begin_layout Description
26311 \begin_inset space ~
26314 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26315 \begin_inset Newline newline
26319 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26327 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26336 \begin_inset Index idx
26339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26340 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26346 \begin_inset Index idx
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26361 \begin_inset Newline newline
26364 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26367 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26371 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26372 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26380 is the default and preferred because
26384 supports only English documents.
26385 The format is specified by using the command
26397 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26398 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26411 ) can be done with this command
26412 \begin_inset Newline newline
26419 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26424 \begin_inset Newline newline
26427 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26431 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26438 \begin_layout Description
26440 \begin_inset space ~
26443 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26445 LatexCommand nameref
26446 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26453 \begin_layout Standard
26454 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26455 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26456 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26460 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26464 \begin_layout Standard
26465 You can only use the style
26469 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26473 is always possible.
26476 \begin_layout Standard
26477 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26478 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26480 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26481 \begin_inset space ~
26485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26487 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26494 \begin_layout Standard
26495 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26499 \begin_inset space ~
26503 \begin_inset space ~
26508 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26509 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26512 \begin_inset space ~
26517 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26518 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26521 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26527 \begin_layout Standard
26528 You can change labels at any time.
26529 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26530 do not need to think about this.
26533 \begin_layout Standard
26534 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26535 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26536 instead of the reference.
26539 \begin_layout Standard
26540 References are described in detail in the section
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26555 \begin_inset space ~
26563 \begin_layout Section
26564 Table of Contents and other Listings
26565 \begin_inset Index idx
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26575 \begin_inset Index idx
26578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26594 \begin_layout Subsection
26596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26598 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26605 \begin_layout Standard
26606 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26608 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26609 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26611 \begin_inset space ~
26615 \begin_inset space ~
26621 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26622 If you click on it, the
26626 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26627 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26628 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26630 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26632 \begin_inset space ~
26637 that is described in section
26638 \begin_inset space ~
26642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26644 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26651 \begin_layout Standard
26652 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26653 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26655 \begin_inset space ~
26659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26661 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26665 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26667 \begin_inset space ~
26671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26673 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26677 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26679 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26682 \begin_layout Subsection
26683 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26686 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26693 \begin_layout Standard
26694 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26696 You can insert them via the
26698 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26702 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26705 \begin_layout Section
26706 URLs and Hyperlinks
26707 \begin_inset Index idx
26710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 \begin_inset Index idx
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 \begin_layout Subsection
26731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26743 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26749 \begin_layout Standard
26750 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26751 \begin_inset Flex URL
26754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26764 \begin_layout Standard
26765 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26771 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26792 \begin_layout Subsection
26794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26796 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26803 \begin_layout Standard
26804 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26806 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26809 or with the toolbar button
26816 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26825 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26826 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26829 name "LyX's homepage"
26830 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26834 , an Email address like this:
26835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26837 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26838 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26843 , or a link to a file.
26846 \begin_layout Standard
26847 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26860 to the link target.
26863 \begin_layout Standard
26864 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26865 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26866 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26867 the text style dialog.
26868 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26874 name "LyX's homepage"
26875 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26882 \begin_layout Standard
26883 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26887 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26889 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26890 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26894 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26896 \begin_inset Newline newline
26904 \begin_inset Newline newline
26911 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26914 \begin_layout Section
26916 \begin_inset Index idx
26919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26928 name "sec:Appendices"
26935 \begin_layout Standard
26936 Appendices are created with the menu
26938 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26940 \begin_inset space ~
26944 \begin_inset space ~
26950 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26951 as the appendix part of the book.
26952 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26955 \begin_layout Standard
26956 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26957 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26958 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26959 and the subsection number.
26960 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26964 \begin_layout Standard
26966 \begin_inset space ~
26970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26972 reference "chap:Credits"
26977 \begin_inset space ~
26981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26983 reference "sub:Export"
26990 \begin_layout Section
26992 \begin_inset Index idx
26995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27004 name "sec:Bibliography"
27011 \begin_layout Standard
27012 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
27013 You can include a bibliography database,
27017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27018 Known under the name
27019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27031 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27032 manually, using the paragraph environment
27036 , which was described in section
27037 \begin_inset space ~
27041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27043 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
27048 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27049 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27053 use a bibliography database.
27056 \begin_layout Subsection
27057 The Bibliography Environment
27060 \begin_layout Standard
27065 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27067 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27076 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27078 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27087 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27091 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27093 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27096 or the toolbar button
27099 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27103 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27104 containing the available citations.
27105 Select one or more keys from the list and
27115 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27116 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27120 \begin_layout Standard
27121 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27122 entry with surrounding brackets.
27127 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27128 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27140 \begin_layout Standard
27143 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27148 key "latexcompanion"
27155 \begin_layout Standard
27156 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27157 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27166 \begin_layout Standard
27167 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27170 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27172 \begin_inset space ~
27180 arg "layout-paragraph"
27184 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27187 \begin_layout Subsection
27188 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27189 \begin_inset Index idx
27192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27193 Bibliography ! Databases
27199 \begin_inset Index idx
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27203 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27211 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27218 \begin_layout Standard
27219 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27225 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27227 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27228 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27233 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27235 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27236 your working field in a database.
27237 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27238 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27239 list for that document.
27240 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27244 \begin_layout Standard
27245 The database is a text file with the file extension
27246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27257 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27258 The format is explained in
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27265 and in the LaTeX books (
27266 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27268 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27273 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27274 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27275 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27276 \begin_inset Flex URL
27279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27289 \begin_layout Standard
27290 To use a database, use the menu
27292 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27297 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27310 \begin_inset space ~
27316 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27317 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27324 Add bibliography to TOC
27326 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27331 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27332 in the document or just the cited references.
27335 \begin_layout Standard
27336 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27348 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27349 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27350 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27352 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27359 \begin_inset Newline newline
27363 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27365 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27377 \begin_layout Standard
27378 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27381 \begin_layout Standard
27382 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27383 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27389 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27390 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27395 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27396 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27397 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 The following variants are possible:
27415 \begin_layout Description
27416 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27417 with other bibliography packages (e.
27418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27422 \begin_inset space \space{}
27429 ), only with the package
27433 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27437 \begin_layout Description
27438 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27439 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27440 with all bibliography packages, except
27445 \begin_layout Description
27446 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27451 , works with all bibliography packages
27454 \begin_layout Standard
27455 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27457 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27463 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27473 When you select the option
27475 Sectioned bibliography
27479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27480 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27483 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27484 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27486 Customizing Bibliographies
27494 Additional Features
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27501 the two methods of creating them.
27502 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27503 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27504 We used the style file
27508 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27511 \begin_layout Subsection
27512 Bibliography layout
27513 \begin_inset Index idx
27516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27517 Bibliography ! Layout
27525 \begin_layout Standard
27526 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27527 For this feature you need to enable the option
27533 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27537 \begin_inset Index idx
27540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27541 Document ! Settings
27551 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27552 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27553 in the previous section.
27556 \begin_layout Standard
27557 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27558 the citation reference window.
27559 Here is an example where the text
27560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27564 \begin_inset space ~
27568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27571 appears after the reference:
27574 \begin_layout Standard
27576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27579 key "latexcompanion"
27586 \begin_layout Section
27588 \begin_inset Index idx
27591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27607 \begin_layout Standard
27608 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27610 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27612 \begin_inset space ~
27617 or the toolbar button
27624 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27625 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27626 by LyX as the index entry.
27629 \begin_layout Standard
27630 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27632 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27633 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27635 \begin_inset space ~
27641 A light blue box labeled
27642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27653 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27654 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27658 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27659 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27663 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27670 \begin_layout Subsection
27671 Grouping Index Entries
27672 \begin_inset Index idx
27675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27685 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27687 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27688 lists under the entry
27689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27697 First we create the entry
27698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27706 \begin_inset space ~
27710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27712 reference "sub:Lists"
27717 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27718 \begin_inset space ~
27722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27724 reference "sec:Itemize"
27728 , we insert the command
27731 \begin_layout Standard
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27741 \begin_layout Standard
27747 \begin_layout Standard
27748 for the enumerated list in section
27749 \begin_inset space ~
27753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27755 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27762 \begin_layout Standard
27763 The exclamation mark
27764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27771 marks the grouping levels.
27772 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27773 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27774 If we don't have an index entry for
27775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27782 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27785 \begin_layout Subsection
27787 \begin_inset Index idx
27790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27791 Index ! Page ranges
27799 \begin_layout Standard
27800 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27802 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27803 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27804 an index entry in section
27805 \begin_inset space ~
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27811 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27821 Paragraph environments|(
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 and another entry at the end of section
27826 \begin_inset space ~
27830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27832 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27839 \begin_layout Standard
27842 Paragraph environments|)
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27870 respectively start and end the index range.
27871 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27872 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27873 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27874 An example is the index entry
27875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27878 Document ! Settings
27879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27885 \begin_layout Subsection
27887 \begin_inset Index idx
27890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27891 Index ! Cross referencing
27899 \begin_layout Standard
27900 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27901 We referred for example in the index entry
27902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27910 \begin_inset space ~
27914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27916 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27920 ) to the index entry
27921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27928 in the same section using the entry
27931 \begin_layout Standard
27934 GIF|see{Image formats}
27937 \begin_layout Standard
27938 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27939 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27940 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27943 \begin_layout Subsection
27945 \begin_inset Index idx
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 Index ! Entry order
27957 \begin_layout Standard
27958 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27959 follow the rules for the index order.
27960 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27965 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27967 \begin_inset space ~
27971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27973 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27982 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27983 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28008 \begin_inset Index idx
28011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28012 Dummy entries ! maïs
28018 \begin_inset Index idx
28021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28022 Dummy entries ! maître
28028 \begin_inset Index idx
28031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28032 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28037 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28038 maïs, maison, maître.
28039 To achieve this, we use the command
28042 \begin_layout Standard
28045 previous entry@current entry
28048 \begin_layout Standard
28049 In our case we want to have
28050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28065 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28074 \begin_layout Standard
28075 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28076 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28077 See the next subsection for an example.
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28087 \begin_layout Standard
28088 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28093 to generate the index (see sec.
28094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28100 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28109 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28117 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28121 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28122 index commands start with
28123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28135 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28140 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28155 \begin_layout Standard
28167 \begin_layout Subsection
28169 \begin_inset Index idx
28172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28173 Index ! Entry layout
28181 \begin_layout Standard
28182 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28189 This is an italic dummy entry
28194 You can also format the page number using the character
28195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28202 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28203 We can write for example
28206 \begin_layout Standard
28209 italic page number:|textit
28212 \begin_layout Standard
28213 to get the page number in italic.
28214 \begin_inset Index idx
28217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28218 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28223 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28241 \begin_inset space ~
28247 Have a look at section
28248 \begin_inset space ~
28252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28254 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28258 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28261 \begin_layout Standard
28262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28270 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28274 to generate the index, see sec.
28275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28281 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28290 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28295 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28296 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28299 key "latexcompanion"
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28312 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28314 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28315 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28316 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28317 If so, put the following in the preamble
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28332 \begin_layout Standard
28336 \begin_layout Standard
28342 \begin_layout Standard
28343 in the index entry.
28344 \begin_inset Index idx
28347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28348 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28353 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28354 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28355 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28360 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28361 a bold font for all index entries.
28362 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28374 documentation for details,
28375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28377 key "makeindex,xindy"
28384 \begin_layout Subsection
28386 \begin_inset Index idx
28389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28398 name "sub:Index-Program"
28405 \begin_layout Standard
28406 If the index generation program
28410 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28414 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28423 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28424 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28425 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28426 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28427 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28437 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28438 dialog, see section
28439 \begin_inset space ~
28443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28445 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28450 The available options are listed and explained in
28451 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28453 key "makeindex,xindy"
28458 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28462 \begin_layout Standard
28463 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28464 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28467 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28468 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28472 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28473 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28476 \begin_layout Subsection
28480 \begin_layout Standard
28481 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28482 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28490 next to the standard index.
28491 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28492 that add this feature.
28498 \begin_inset Index idx
28501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28502 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28507 package to generate multiple indexes.
28508 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28513 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28521 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28522 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28523 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28534 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28535 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28538 and select the option
28540 Use multiple Indexes
28547 already contains the standard index
28548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28556 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28557 also appear as a heading) to the
28561 input field and press the
28566 The new index now also appears in the list.
28567 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28571 \begin_layout Standard
28572 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28575 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28582 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28583 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28584 are additional features:
28587 \begin_layout Itemize
28588 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28589 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28592 \begin_layout Itemize
28593 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28594 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28602 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28603 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28604 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28605 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28608 \begin_layout Section
28609 Nomenclature/Glossary
28610 \begin_inset Index idx
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28620 \begin_inset Index idx
28623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28654 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28661 \begin_layout Standard
28662 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28663 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28664 called nomenclature or glossary.
28667 \begin_layout Standard
28668 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28674 \begin_inset Index idx
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28678 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28684 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28685 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28691 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28694 \begin_layout Standard
28695 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28696 and then use the menu
28698 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28704 \begin_inset space ~
28709 or the toolbar button
28712 arg "nomencl-insert"
28717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28728 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28731 \begin_layout Standard
28732 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28733 The first is the term or
28737 that you wish to define.
28742 of the term or symbol.
28745 \begin_layout Standard
28746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28762 \begin_layout Subsection
28763 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28764 \begin_inset Index idx
28767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28768 Nomenclature ! Layout
28776 \begin_layout Standard
28777 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28781 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28787 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28795 \begin_inset Newline newline
28803 \begin_inset Newline newline
28809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28816 character starts/ends the formula.
28817 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28829 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28839 \begin_layout Standard
28840 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28841 \begin_inset space ~
28845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28847 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28854 \begin_layout Standard
28858 \begin_inset space ~
28863 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28864 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28869 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28876 in this document is:
28877 \begin_inset Newline newline
28882 dummy entry for the character
28887 \begin_inset Newline newline
28899 \begin_inset space ~
28909 font use the command
28938 \begin_layout Standard
28939 If the characters |
28940 \begin_inset space \space{}
28944 \begin_inset space \space{}
28948 \begin_inset space \space{}
28952 \begin_inset space \space{}
28956 \begin_inset space \space{}
28959 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28960 a quote character in front of them.
28961 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28962 LatexCommand nomenclature
28963 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28964 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28971 \begin_layout Subsection
28972 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28973 \begin_inset Index idx
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28986 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28987 the symbol definition.
28988 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28990 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28993 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28994 LatexCommand nomenclature
28996 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29003 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29007 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29008 LatexCommand nomenclature
29011 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29016 They will be sorted by
29017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29043 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29046 will be sorted before the
29050 since the character
29051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29058 is considered in sorting.
29061 \begin_layout Standard
29062 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29065 \begin_inset space ~
29070 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29071 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29073 For the example given, you can insert
29077 in this field for the
29078 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29085 will be located before
29086 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29092 \begin_layout Standard
29093 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29098 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29107 \begin_layout Subsection
29108 Nomenclature Options
29109 \begin_inset Index idx
29112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29113 Nomenclature ! Options
29121 \begin_layout Standard
29126 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29127 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29130 \begin_layout Description
29131 refeq Appends the phrase
29132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29147 to every nomenclature entry, where
29153 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29156 \begin_layout Description
29157 refpage Appends the phrase
29158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29173 to every nomenclature entry, where
29179 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29182 \begin_layout Description
29183 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29186 \begin_layout Standard
29187 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29188 class options list in the
29190 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29194 In this document the options
29201 \begin_layout Standard
29202 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29208 \begin_layout Standard
29209 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29210 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29215 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29218 \begin_layout Description
29228 \begin_layout Description
29231 nomrefpage Like the
29238 \begin_layout Description
29241 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29250 \begin_layout Description
29254 \begin_inset space ~
29260 \begin_inset space ~
29265 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29277 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29278 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29289 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29292 \begin_inset Newline newline
29299 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29304 \begin_inset Newline newline
29308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29323 by their translation.
29326 \begin_layout Subsection
29327 Printing the Nomenclature
29328 \begin_inset Index idx
29331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29332 Nomenclature ! Printing
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29341 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29343 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29344 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29360 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29361 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29362 You can choose between these settings:
29365 \begin_layout Description
29366 Default a space of 1
29367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29373 \begin_layout Description
29375 \begin_inset space ~
29379 \begin_inset space ~
29382 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29385 \begin_layout Description
29386 Custom custom space
29389 \begin_layout Standard
29390 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29399 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29407 For example, in order to change the name to
29411 , add the following line to the preamble:
29414 \begin_layout Standard
29422 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29425 \begin_layout Subsection
29426 Nomenclature Program
29427 \begin_inset Index idx
29430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 Nomenclature ! Program
29437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29439 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 LyX uses the program
29451 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29452 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29457 by adding options, see section
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29464 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29469 The available options are listed and explained in
29470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29472 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29479 \begin_layout Section
29481 \begin_inset Index idx
29484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29491 \begin_inset Index idx
29494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29495 Document ! Branches
29501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29503 name "sec:Branches"
29510 \begin_layout Standard
29511 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29512 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29513 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29514 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29517 \begin_layout Standard
29518 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29519 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29520 To create a branch, either select the menu
29522 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29523 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29526 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29528 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29535 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29536 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29537 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29538 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29539 (see below for an example).
29540 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29541 to the name of the other) and to add
29542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29554 \begin_inset space ~
29557 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29558 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29561 \begin_layout Standard
29562 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29563 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29565 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29568 where you can choose a branch.
29569 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29573 \begin_layout Standard
29574 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29575 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29578 \begin_layout Standard
29579 \begin_inset Branch Question
29582 \begin_layout Standard
29583 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29591 \begin_layout Standard
29592 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29595 \begin_layout Standard
29596 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29604 \begin_layout Standard
29611 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29612 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29615 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29616 Consider for example a file
29617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29624 which has the above branches.
29626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29633 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29657 branch were inactive,
29658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29673 branch was active, likewise
29674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29689 branch was active, and
29690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29693 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29697 if both branches were active.
29698 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29701 \begin_layout Standard
29702 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29710 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29712 For example you can define for the question branch
29716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29717 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29718 \begin_inset space ~
29722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29724 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29756 \begin_layout Standard
29757 and for the answer branch
29760 \begin_layout Standard
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 \begin_inset Branch Question
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29816 \begin_layout Standard
29817 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29852 \begin_layout Standard
29853 Now it is possible to use the
29857 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29864 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29867 commands to obtain conditional output.
29868 Here is an example formula where only the
29875 \begin_inset Formula
29877 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29895 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29901 \begin_inset space \space{}
29904 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29905 For this advanced usage, see the
29910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29913 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29920 \begin_layout Section
29922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29924 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29929 \begin_inset Index idx
29932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29944 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29945 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29948 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29950 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29955 \begin_inset Index idx
29958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29959 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29964 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29965 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29966 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29967 part of the document.
29971 \begin_layout Standard
29972 The header information in the dialog tab
29976 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29977 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29978 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29979 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29987 \begin_inset space ~
29992 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29993 title and author entries.
29997 \begin_inset space ~
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30005 \begin_inset space ~
30010 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30013 \begin_layout Standard
30014 You can specify in the dialog tab
30018 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30023 \begin_inset space ~
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30036 option allows long links to be split;
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30043 \begin_inset space ~
30047 \begin_inset space ~
30055 \begin_inset space ~
30060 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30068 colors the different links.
30069 The default colors are:
30072 \begin_layout Labeling
30073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30078 for hyperlinks and URLs
30081 \begin_layout Labeling
30082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30090 \begin_layout Labeling
30091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30099 \begin_layout Standard
30100 but you can change these in the field
30105 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30111 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30119 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30120 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30121 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30124 \begin_layout Standard
30129 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30130 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30131 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30141 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30142 when opening the PDF.
30144 \begin_inset space ~
30147 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30148 \begin_inset space ~
30151 1 will only display the sections.
30154 \begin_layout Standard
30155 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30156 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30162 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30172 \begin_layout Section
30173 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30176 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30183 \begin_layout Subsection
30185 \begin_inset Index idx
30188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30197 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30205 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30206 constructs, but not all.
30207 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30208 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30209 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30210 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30211 and their commands.
30214 \begin_layout Standard
30215 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30217 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30219 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30232 \begin_inset space ~
30237 or by the toolbar button
30250 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30260 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30261 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30262 using the LaTeX-command
30268 , you can write the command part
30274 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30278 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30279 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30280 the following example:
30283 \begin_layout Standard
30284 \begin_inset Graphics
30285 filename clipart/ERT.png
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30297 \begin_layout Standard
30298 This is a line with a
30302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30325 \begin_layout Standard
30326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30334 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30335 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30343 \begin_layout Subsection
30344 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30345 \begin_inset Argument 1
30348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 \begin_inset Index idx
30358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30367 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30375 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30376 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30377 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30386 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30387 any time if you know the right commands.
30388 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30389 is the end of the day.
30390 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30391 all caption labels bold.
30392 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30394 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30398 \begin_layout Standard
30399 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30400 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30401 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30412 \begin_layout Standard
30413 As result you find that the package
30418 \begin_inset Index idx
30421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30422 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30428 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30430 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30433 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30448 \begin_inset space ~
30456 \begin_layout Standard
30461 usepackage[options]{package name}
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30466 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30467 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30470 \begin_layout Standard
30471 In your case the package name is
30476 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30481 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30482 So you add the command
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30490 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30499 For more commands provided by the
30503 package, have a look at its documentation,
30504 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30519 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30521 For example if you use a
30525 class, you don't need the package
30529 , you can instead write
30532 \begin_layout Standard
30537 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30544 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30545 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30552 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30556 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30557 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30559 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30560 the previous section.
30563 \begin_layout Standard
30564 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30566 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30568 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30582 \begin_layout Standard
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30596 \begin_inset Note Note
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30600 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30608 \begin_layout Left Header
30609 \begin_inset Argument 1
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30632 \begin_inset Note Note
30635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 defines the header line as described below
30644 \begin_layout Center Header
30645 \begin_inset Argument 1
30648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 \begin_layout Right Header
30658 \begin_inset Argument 1
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30682 \begin_layout Left Footer
30683 \begin_inset Argument 1
30686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30707 \begin_layout Center Footer
30708 \begin_inset Argument 1
30711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 \begin_inset Newline newline
30726 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30732 \begin_layout Right Footer
30733 \begin_inset Argument 1
30736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30758 \begin_layout Section
30759 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30762 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30767 \begin_inset Index idx
30770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30771 Document ! Header/Footer line
30777 \begin_inset Index idx
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30789 \begin_layout Standard
30790 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30794 \begin_inset space ~
30805 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30817 As a second step add in the menu
30819 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30820 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30827 Custom Header/Footerlines
30828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30832 This module offers the following 6
30833 \begin_inset space ~
30839 \begin_layout Description
30841 \begin_inset space ~
30845 \begin_inset space ~
30849 \begin_inset space ~
30853 \begin_inset space ~
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30863 \begin_layout Description
30865 \begin_inset space ~
30869 \begin_inset space ~
30873 \begin_inset space ~
30877 \begin_inset space ~
30881 \begin_inset space ~
30887 \begin_layout Standard
30888 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30891 \begin_layout Standard
30892 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30893 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30895 \begin_inset space ~
30899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30901 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30905 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30908 \begin_layout Standard
30909 \begin_inset Float figure
30915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 \begin_inset Tabular
30919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30920 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30921 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30923 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30987 The normal text on the page goes here.
30988 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30990 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30991 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30996 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31034 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31063 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31081 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31086 name "fig:Page-layout"
31090 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31112 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31116 \begin_inset space ~
31121 is set to “Default”.
31122 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31131 \begin_layout Subsection
31135 \begin_layout Standard
31136 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31137 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31138 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31139 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31141 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31142 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31149 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 \begin_inset space ~
31170 \begin_layout Description
31173 thepage prints the current page number
31176 \begin_layout Description
31179 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31182 \begin_layout Description
31185 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31188 \begin_layout Description
31191 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31192 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31199 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31202 because it usually goes in a left header.
31205 \begin_layout Description
31208 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31209 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31211 It is normally used in the right header.
31214 \begin_layout Subsection
31215 Default header/footer
31218 \begin_layout Standard
31219 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31220 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31221 footer has the page number.
31222 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31223 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31224 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31227 \begin_inset space ~
31235 \begin_layout Subsection
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31240 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31241 Some pages are different.
31242 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31243 a new part or chapter in your book.
31244 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31245 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31246 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31250 Header and footer decoration line
31253 \begin_layout Standard
31254 By default, you get a 0.4
31255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31258 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31259 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31271 in the following way:
31274 \begin_layout Standard
31281 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31284 \begin_layout Standard
31285 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31294 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31301 \begin_layout Standard
31302 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31303 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31304 \begin_inset space ~
31308 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31318 Several header/footer lines
31321 \begin_layout Standard
31322 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31323 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31324 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31326 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31340 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31341 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 \begin_inset space ~
31362 \begin_layout Standard
31369 headheight}{height}
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31373 where height is a size in standard units.
31374 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31375 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31376 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31378 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31395 \begin_inset space ~
31400 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31405 \begin_inset Index idx
31408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31409 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31415 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31416 for your header/footer.
31419 \begin_layout Subsection
31423 \begin_layout Standard
31424 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31425 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31426 This example consists of the following definition:
31429 \begin_layout Description
31431 \begin_inset space ~
31440 , empty optional argument
31443 \begin_layout Description
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31448 Header empty, empty optional argument
31451 \begin_layout Description
31453 \begin_inset space ~
31462 in the optional argument
31465 \begin_layout Description
31467 \begin_inset space ~
31476 in the optional argument
31479 \begin_layout Description
31481 \begin_inset space ~
31493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31497 \begin_inset Newline newline
31501 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31508 in the optional argument
31511 \begin_layout Description
31513 \begin_inset space ~
31522 , empty optional argument
31525 \begin_layout Description
31528 headrulewidth set to 2
31529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31535 \begin_layout Standard
31536 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31537 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31543 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31553 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31559 \begin_layout Standard
31563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31567 pagestyle{headings}
31573 \begin_inset Note Note
31576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31577 switches back to page style with the default headings
31585 \begin_layout Section
31586 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31589 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31594 \begin_inset Index idx
31597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 \begin_inset Index idx
31607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31616 \begin_layout Standard
31617 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31618 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31619 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31622 \begin_layout Subsection
31626 \begin_layout Standard
31627 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31632 \begin_inset Index idx
31635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31636 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31641 (on some systems named simply
31646 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31648 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31654 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31655 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31663 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31664 automatically installed together with LyX.
31667 \begin_layout Subsection
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31672 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31673 LaTeX, activate the option
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31683 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31689 \begin_inset space ~
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31696 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31703 \begin_inset space ~
31716 \begin_inset space ~
31721 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31725 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31729 \begin_inset space ~
31737 \begin_inset space ~
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31750 \begin_layout Standard
31751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31759 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31760 generated by activating the option
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31769 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31777 \begin_layout Subsection
31778 Selected document parts
31781 \begin_layout Standard
31782 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31783 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31784 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31785 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31787 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31791 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31792 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31793 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31803 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31814 is explained in section
31816 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31821 \begin_inset space ~
31831 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31832 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31834 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31836 Here is the result:
31839 \begin_layout Standard
31840 \begin_inset Preview
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31851 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31857 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31867 height_special "totalheight"
31870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31895 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31901 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31923 \begin_layout Standard
31924 Previewing works also for colors.
31925 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 is explained in section
31950 \begin_inset space ~
31963 \begin_layout Standard
31964 \begin_inset Preview
31966 \begin_layout Standard
31970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31989 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31994 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32013 \begin_layout Standard
32014 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32022 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
32023 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
32025 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
32026 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
32027 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
32028 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
32032 \begin_layout Subsection
32036 \begin_layout Standard
32037 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
32040 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32042 \begin_inset space ~
32047 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
32048 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32050 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32051 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32052 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32053 the source view window.
32058 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32059 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32060 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32063 \begin_layout Section
32064 Advanced Find and Replace
32065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32067 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32072 \begin_inset Index idx
32075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32082 \begin_inset Index idx
32085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32094 \begin_layout Subsection
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32100 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32101 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32102 The key-features are:
32105 \begin_layout Itemize
32106 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32107 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32108 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32112 \begin_layout Itemize
32113 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32114 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32115 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32116 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32119 \begin_layout Itemize
32120 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32121 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32122 outside of mathematics environments
32125 \begin_layout Itemize
32126 Search may be widened to a specific
32131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32135 \begin_inset space ~
32138 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32139 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32146 \begin_layout Itemize
32147 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32148 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32153 \begin_inset space ~
32156 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32159 \begin_layout Subsection
32163 \begin_layout Standard
32164 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32166 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32179 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32182 ) or the toolbar button
32185 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32191 Advanced Find and Replace
32196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32200 \begin_layout Standard
32205 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32209 \begin_inset space ~
32214 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32217 arg "paragraph-break"
32221 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32222 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32226 arg "paragraph-break"
32229 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32233 searches backwards.
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32240 \begin_inset space ~
32245 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32254 \begin_inset space ~
32259 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32263 Searching for mathematics
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32267 Mathematical formulas, such as
32268 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32271 or something more complex like
32272 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32275 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32280 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32281 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32282 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32283 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32295 This is done by switching to the
32299 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32304 This way, entering in the
32311 \begin_layout Itemize
32312 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32313 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32316 \begin_layout Itemize
32317 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32318 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32321 \begin_layout Itemize
32322 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32323 of it only within section headings.
32324 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32325 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32329 \begin_layout Itemize
32330 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32331 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32338 \begin_layout Standard
32339 The entries made in the
32343 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32346 \begin_inset space ~
32352 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32356 button or alternatively press
32359 arg "paragraph-break"
32366 while the cursor is in the
32369 \begin_inset space ~
32377 \begin_layout Standard
32378 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32379 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32383 \begin_layout Itemize
32384 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32385 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32393 with its typewriter version
32394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32408 \begin_layout Itemize
32409 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32415 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32427 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32434 (you may want to enable the
32437 \begin_inset space ~
32445 \begin_inset space ~
32450 options and disable the
32458 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32466 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32467 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32471 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32474 , or occurrences of
32475 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32479 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32485 \begin_layout Subsection
32489 \begin_layout Standard
32490 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32495 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32499 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32508 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32514 This is done with the context menu
32516 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32517 Insert Regular Expression
32519 while the cursor is in the
32524 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32525 expression matching rules
32529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32530 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32536 \begin_inset space ~
32539 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32540 to match expressions.
32545 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32546 same text in the document.
32547 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32548 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32551 \begin_layout Enumerate
32552 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32557 editor the fraction
32558 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32562 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32565 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32566 fractions with the given denominator.
32569 \begin_layout Enumerate
32570 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32582 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32587 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32588 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32589 Also, by inserting a
32590 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32593 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32594 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32597 \begin_layout Standard
32598 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32599 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32600 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32603 , and referring back to them through
32604 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32608 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32612 For example, try searching with the regexp
32613 \begin_inset Newline newline
32616 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32619 \begin_inset Newline newline
32622 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32625 \begin_layout Standard
32626 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32629 \begin_layout Standard
32630 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32638 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32639 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32640 sub-expressions is absolute.
32642 \begin_inset space ~
32646 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32649 always refers to the first occurrence of
32650 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32653 in all entered regexps.
32661 \begin_layout Section
32663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32665 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32670 \begin_inset Index idx
32673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32682 \begin_layout Standard
32683 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32686 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32693 key or the toolbar button
32696 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32699 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32700 beginning of the currently selected text.
32701 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32702 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32703 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32704 scrolled so that it is visible.
32705 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32706 n, if any could be found.
32707 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32711 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32712 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32715 \begin_layout Standard
32716 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32723 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32724 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32725 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32726 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32729 \begin_inset space ~
32737 arg "dialog-show character"
32740 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32741 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32744 \begin_layout Standard
32745 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32746 \begin_inset Newline newline
32750 \begin_inset Flex URL
32753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32755 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32761 \begin_inset Newline newline
32765 \begin_inset space ~
32768 files for each language.
32769 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32770 \begin_inset space ~
32773 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32782 \begin_inset Newline newline
32785 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32786 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32787 but in most cases these are
32803 is the language code.
32806 \begin_layout Subsection
32810 \begin_layout Standard
32813 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32814 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32819 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32822 you can set the following things:
32825 \begin_layout Description
32827 \begin_inset space ~
32830 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32831 Depending on your platform,
32845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32846 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32847 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32862 \begin_layout Description
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32867 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32868 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32871 \begin_layout Description
32873 \begin_inset space ~
32876 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32882 \begin_inset space \space{}
32886 This should normally not be needed.
32889 \begin_layout Description
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32895 \begin_inset space ~
32898 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32910 \begin_layout Description
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32915 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32916 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32917 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32918 appear in a context menu.
32919 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32923 \begin_layout Description
32925 \begin_inset space ~
32929 \begin_inset space ~
32933 \begin_inset space ~
32936 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32940 \begin_layout Section
32942 \begin_inset Index idx
32945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32954 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32963 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32975 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32984 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32985 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32986 which are available for many languages.
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32994 \begin_layout Subsection
32995 Setting up the thesaurus
32998 \begin_layout Standard
33007 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33011 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33016 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33022 \begin_inset space ~
33030 For instance, the US English files are named:
33033 \begin_layout Itemize
33037 \begin_layout Itemize
33041 \begin_layout Standard
33050 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33051 and you just need to point LyX (in
33053 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33054 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33055 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33057 \begin_inset space ~
33062 ) to the path where they are installed.
33066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33067 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33068 ies, typical locations are
33074 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33078 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33082 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33085 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33091 LibreOffice-<Version>
33098 On the Mac, the default location is
33100 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33101 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33102 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33103 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33104 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33105 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33113 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33114 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33115 correct place right away.
33118 \begin_layout Standard
33119 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33120 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33124 \begin_layout Itemize
33125 \begin_inset Flex URL
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33130 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33138 \begin_layout Standard
33139 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33140 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33142 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33143 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33144 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33146 \begin_inset space ~
33152 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33153 and point LyX there.
33156 \begin_layout Standard
33157 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33159 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33162 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33168 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33171 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33179 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33180 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33181 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33188 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33191 \begin_layout Subsection
33192 Using the thesaurus
33195 \begin_layout Standard
33196 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33198 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33201 or the toolbar button
33204 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33207 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33209 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33211 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33212 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33213 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33222 ), related terms (such as
33225 \begin_inset space ~
33234 ), compounds (such as
33237 \begin_inset space ~
33246 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33255 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33259 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33260 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33264 \begin_layout Standard
33265 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33266 the dictionary, such as the above
33270 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33275 \begin_inset space \space{}
33278 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33279 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33280 For example, looking up the word form
33284 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33289 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33294 \begin_inset space \space{}
33305 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33306 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33307 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33310 \begin_layout Section
33312 \begin_inset Index idx
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 \begin_inset Index idx
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 Document ! Change Tracking
33332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33334 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33343 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33344 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33345 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33347 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33352 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33354 \begin_inset space ~
33362 \begin_layout Standard
33363 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33377 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33378 You can change the color in
33380 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33381 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33387 \begin_inset space ~
33392 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33398 \begin_inset Index idx
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 Color ! Change tracking
33407 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33408 the cursor is in changed text.
33409 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33412 arg "changes-merge"
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33419 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33420 \begin_inset Index idx
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33432 \begin_layout Standard
33433 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33440 \begin_inset Graphics
33441 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33449 \begin_layout Standard
33450 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33457 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33467 \begin_layout Standard
33468 \begin_inset Tabular
33469 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33470 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33471 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33472 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 arg "changes-track"
33490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33501 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33521 arg "changes-output"
33529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33537 \begin_inset space ~
33540 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33542 \begin_inset space ~
33546 \begin_inset space ~
33550 \begin_inset space ~
33559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33580 Jumps to the next change
33586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 arg "change-accept"
33603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33611 \begin_inset space ~
33614 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33616 \begin_inset space ~
33625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33634 arg "change-reject"
33642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33650 \begin_inset space ~
33653 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33655 \begin_inset space ~
33664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 arg "changes-merge"
33681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33687 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33689 \begin_inset space ~
33692 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33694 \begin_inset space ~
33703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33712 arg "all-changes-accept"
33720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33726 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33728 \begin_inset space ~
33731 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33755 arg "all-changes-reject"
33763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33771 \begin_inset space ~
33774 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33776 \begin_inset space ~
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33812 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33813 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33826 \begin_inset space ~
33835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33860 \begin_inset space ~
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33877 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33883 \begin_layout Standard
33884 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33905 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33906 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33907 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33908 the next change after the current cursor position.
33909 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33910 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33911 step to the next change.
33912 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33915 \begin_layout Standard
33916 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33917 to describe a change.
33920 \begin_layout Standard
33921 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33926 \begin_inset Index idx
33929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33930 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33936 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33943 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33946 \begin_layout Section
33947 Comparison of Documents
33948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33950 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33955 \begin_inset Index idx
33958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33959 Comparison of documents
33967 \begin_layout Standard
33968 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33970 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33974 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33976 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33977 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34018 \begin_inset space ~
34023 enables the change tracking option
34026 \begin_inset space ~
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34039 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34042 \begin_layout Section
34043 International Support
34044 \begin_inset Index idx
34047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34048 International support
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34057 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34058 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34059 up LyX to use them:
34060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34062 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34069 \begin_layout Standard
34070 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34077 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34084 \begin_layout Subsection
34086 \begin_inset Index idx
34089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34096 \begin_inset Index idx
34099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34100 Document ! Settings
34106 \begin_inset Index idx
34109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34110 Document ! Language
34118 \begin_layout Standard
34121 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34122 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34125 dialog lets you set
34127 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34132 \begin_layout Standard
34137 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34141 \begin_inset space ~
34146 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34147 For details about the different encoding options see section
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34154 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34161 \begin_layout Subsection
34162 Keyboard mapping configuration
34163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34165 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34172 \begin_layout Standard
34173 If you have for example a U.
34174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34177 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34178 can use an alternate keymap.
34179 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34180 use an Italian keymap.
34183 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34184 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34185 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34188 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34189 \begin_inset space ~
34193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34195 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34200 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34201 which one you want to use.
34204 \begin_layout Standard
34205 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34206 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34207 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34211 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34212 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34213 one to support the characters you want.
34214 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34221 \begin_layout Chapter
34224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34226 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34233 \begin_layout Standard
34234 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34235 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34236 topic inside the user's guide.
34239 \begin_layout Section
34241 \begin_inset Index idx
34244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34258 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34261 \begin_layout Subsection
34265 \begin_layout Standard
34266 Creates a new document.
34269 \begin_layout Subsection
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34275 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34276 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34279 \begin_layout Subsection
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34287 \begin_layout Subsection
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34293 Click there on a file to open it.
34296 \begin_layout Subsection
34300 \begin_layout Standard
34301 Closes the current document.
34304 \begin_layout Subsection
34308 \begin_layout Standard
34309 Closes all opened documents.
34312 \begin_layout Subsection
34316 \begin_layout Standard
34317 Saves the actual document.
34320 \begin_layout Subsection
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34328 \begin_layout Subsection
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34333 Saves all opened documents.
34336 \begin_layout Subsection
34340 \begin_layout Standard
34341 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34344 \begin_layout Subsection
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34349 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34350 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34351 It is described in the section
34353 Version Control in LyX
34357 Additional Features
34362 \begin_layout Subsection
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34368 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34370 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34373 \begin_layout Standard
34374 When using the menu entry
34377 \begin_inset space ~
34382 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34386 \begin_inset space ~
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34399 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34400 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34403 \begin_layout Subsection
34405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34415 You can export your document to various file formats.
34416 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34417 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34418 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34421 \begin_layout Standard
34422 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34424 \begin_inset space ~
34428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34430 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34437 \begin_layout Description
34443 \begin_inset space ~
34450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34457 yX format of the special LyX
34458 \begin_inset space ~
34461 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34462 \begin_inset Newline newline
34465 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34468 \begin_layout Description
34469 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34475 \begin_layout Description
34477 \begin_inset space ~
34480 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34486 \begin_layout Description
34487 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34488 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34489 files paths or file names in your document.
34490 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34497 \begin_layout Description
34498 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34499 in files paths or file names
34502 \begin_layout Description
34504 \begin_inset space ~
34511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34518 eX) DVI-format using the program
34522 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34533 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34541 \begin_layout Description
34543 \begin_inset space ~
34546 (cropped) the same as
34550 but with cropped page margins.
34553 \begin_layout Description
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34558 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34562 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34567 \begin_layout Description
34571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34579 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34587 \begin_layout Description
34589 \begin_inset space ~
34593 \begin_inset space ~
34596 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34600 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34608 \begin_layout Description
34615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34623 \begin_inset space ~
34634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34647 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34652 \begin_layout Description
34659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34667 \begin_inset space ~
34672 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34673 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34677 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34680 \begin_layout Description
34687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34700 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34701 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34709 \begin_layout Description
34716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34748 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34753 \begin_layout Description
34755 \begin_inset space ~
34759 \begin_inset space ~
34768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34777 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34778 music notation software
34783 \begin_layout Description
34790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34803 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34808 \begin_inset space \space{}
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34831 represent the version number)
34834 \begin_layout Description
34841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34858 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34859 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34860 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34863 \begin_layout Description
34870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34882 \begin_layout Description
34883 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34888 \begin_layout Description
34889 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34891 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34894 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34898 \begin_layout Description
34900 \begin_inset space ~
34903 (cropped) the same as
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34911 but with cropped page margins
34914 \begin_layout Description
34918 \begin_inset space ~
34923 PDF-format using the program
34927 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34930 \begin_layout Description
34934 \begin_inset space ~
34938 \begin_inset space ~
34946 \begin_inset space ~
34951 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34956 \begin_inset space \space{}
34959 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34963 \begin_layout Description
34967 \begin_inset space ~
34974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34983 PDF-format using the program
34987 , produces PDF-files directly
34990 \begin_layout Description
34994 \begin_inset space ~
34999 PDF-format using the program
35003 , produces PDF-files directly
35006 \begin_layout Description
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35015 PDF-format using the program
35019 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35022 \begin_layout Description
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35042 PDF-format using the program
35046 , produces PDF-files directly
35049 \begin_layout Description
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35061 \begin_layout Description
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35074 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35075 and then exported as text using the program
35080 \begin_layout Description
35085 PostScript format using the program
35090 \begin_layout Description
35091 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35092 programming language
35105 it is possible to use
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 If one of the menu entries
35120 \begin_inset space ~
35129 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35130 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35131 \begin_inset space ~
35135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35137 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35142 \begin_inset Index idx
35145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35146 Reconfiguration of LyX
35154 \begin_layout Subsection
35158 \begin_layout Standard
35159 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35160 format or send it to a printer.
35161 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35162 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35168 For more information have a look at section
35169 \begin_inset space ~
35173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35175 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35182 \begin_layout Subsection
35186 \begin_layout Standard
35187 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35188 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35189 prefix, see section
35190 \begin_inset space ~
35194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35196 reference "sec:Paths"
35201 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35210 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35211 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35218 reference "sub:Converters"
35225 \begin_layout Subsection
35226 New and Close Window
35229 \begin_layout Standard
35230 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35233 \begin_layout Subsection
35237 \begin_layout Standard
35238 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35241 \begin_layout Section
35243 \begin_inset Index idx
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 \begin_layout Subsection
35259 \begin_layout Standard
35260 Described in section
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35267 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35274 \begin_layout Subsection
35275 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35278 \begin_layout Standard
35279 Described in section
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35286 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35293 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 \begin_layout Standard
35298 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35299 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35302 \begin_layout Subsection
35306 \begin_layout Standard
35307 Selects the whole document.
35310 \begin_layout Subsection
35311 Find & Replace (Quick)
35314 \begin_layout Standard
35315 Described in section
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35322 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35329 \begin_layout Subsection
35330 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35333 \begin_layout Standard
35334 Described in section
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35341 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35348 \begin_layout Subsection
35349 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35352 \begin_layout Standard
35353 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35357 \begin_layout Subsection
35361 \begin_layout Standard
35362 Described in section
35363 \begin_inset space ~
35367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35369 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35376 \begin_layout Subsection
35378 \begin_inset Index idx
35381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35382 Paragraph ! Settings
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35392 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35396 \begin_layout Standard
35397 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35398 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35404 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35405 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35415 \begin_layout Subsection
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35420 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35421 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35422 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35426 \begin_layout Standard
35427 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35429 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35430 The properties of tables are described in section
35431 \begin_inset space ~
35435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35437 reference "sec:Tables"
35441 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35448 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35455 \begin_layout Subsection
35456 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35459 \begin_layout Standard
35460 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35462 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35469 reference "sec:Nesting"
35474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35476 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35483 \begin_layout Subsection
35486 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35489 \begin_layout Standard
35490 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35491 nts of the same type.
35493 \begin_inset space ~
35497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35499 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35503 for an explanation.
35506 \begin_layout Section
35508 \begin_inset Index idx
35511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35521 At the bottom of the
35525 menu the opened documents are listed.
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35529 Open/Close all Insets
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35533 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35536 \begin_layout Subsection
35537 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 Math macros are described in the
35552 \begin_layout Subsection
35556 \begin_layout Standard
35557 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35564 reference "sec:Navigating"
35569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35571 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35578 \begin_layout Subsection
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35591 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35598 \begin_layout Subsection
35602 \begin_layout Standard
35603 Opens a window showing console messages.
35604 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35608 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35609 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35612 \begin_layout Subsection
35614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35616 name "sub:Toolbars"
35621 \begin_inset Index idx
35624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 \begin_layout Standard
35634 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35635 All toolbars and the
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35643 can be turned on and off.
35648 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35672 \begin_inset space ~
35677 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35681 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35688 \begin_layout Standard
35693 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35697 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35698 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35699 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35700 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35701 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35705 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35712 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35719 \begin_layout Subsection
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35731 \begin_inset space ~
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35752 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35755 \begin_inset space ~
35759 \begin_inset space ~
35763 \begin_inset space ~
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35771 \begin_inset space ~
35775 \begin_inset space ~
35780 will split it horizontally.
35781 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35782 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35783 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35784 three or more documents at the same time.
35785 To close a split view, use the menu
35788 \begin_inset space ~
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35800 \begin_layout Subsection
35804 \begin_layout Standard
35805 Closes a split view.
35808 \begin_layout Subsection
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35814 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35815 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35816 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35817 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35820 \begin_layout Section
35822 \begin_inset Index idx
35825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35834 \begin_layout Subsection
35838 \begin_layout Standard
35839 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35840 \begin_inset space ~
35844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35846 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35857 \begin_layout Subsection
35859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35861 name "sub:Special-Character"
35868 \begin_layout Standard
35869 Here you can insert the following characters:
35872 \begin_layout Description
35877 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35879 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35880 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35881 You can get a complete display by checking
35884 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \begin_inset Newline newline
35894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35902 Not all characters will be visible in the
35906 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35914 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35918 ) can display every character.
35926 \begin_layout Description
35927 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35931 \begin_layout Description
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35940 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35941 \begin_inset space ~
35945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35947 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35954 \begin_layout Description
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35959 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35962 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35963 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35969 \begin_layout Description
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35974 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35977 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35978 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35984 \begin_layout Description
35986 \begin_inset space ~
35989 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35993 \begin_layout Description
35995 \begin_inset space ~
35998 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
36002 \begin_layout Description
36004 \begin_inset space ~
36007 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36013 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36019 \begin_layout Description
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36024 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
36028 \begin_layout Description
36030 \begin_inset space ~
36034 \begin_inset Index idx
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 \begin_inset Index idx
36047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36048 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36053 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36054 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36056 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
36061 \begin_inset Index idx
36064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
36071 \begin_inset Newline newline
36074 More information about this feature can be found in the
36080 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36086 \begin_layout Subsection
36090 \begin_layout Standard
36091 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36094 \begin_layout Description
36095 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36096 \begin_inset script superscript
36098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36107 \begin_layout Description
36108 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36109 \begin_inset script subscript
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36120 \begin_layout Description
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36125 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36132 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36139 \begin_layout Description
36141 \begin_inset space ~
36144 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36151 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36158 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36163 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36170 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36177 \begin_layout Description
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36182 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36188 \begin_inset space \space{}
36191 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36192 An example from the LyX
36197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36200 To insert a fraction use the command
36205 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36209 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36218 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36225 \begin_layout Description
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36237 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36244 \begin_layout Description
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36249 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36256 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36263 \begin_layout Description
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36268 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36282 \begin_layout Description
36283 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36290 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36297 \begin_layout Description
36299 \begin_inset space ~
36302 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36303 \begin_inset space ~
36307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36309 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36316 \begin_layout Description
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36321 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36328 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36335 \begin_layout Description
36337 \begin_inset space ~
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36344 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36351 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36358 \begin_layout Description
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36363 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36364 as described in section
36365 \begin_inset space ~
36369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36371 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36378 \begin_layout Description
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36383 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36390 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36397 \begin_layout Description
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36402 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36403 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36411 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36418 \begin_layout Description
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36423 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36424 \begin_inset space ~
36428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36430 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36437 \begin_layout Description
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36446 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36453 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36460 \begin_layout Subsection
36464 \begin_layout Standard
36465 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36490 are described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "sec:toc"
36506 is described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "sec:Index"
36521 is described in section
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36528 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36534 BibTeX Bibliography
36536 is described in section
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36543 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36550 \begin_layout Subsection
36554 \begin_layout Standard
36555 To insert floats, as described in section
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36562 reference "sec:Floats"
36566 and in detail the chapter
36573 \begin_inset space ~
36581 \begin_layout Subsection
36585 \begin_layout Standard
36586 To insert notes, described in section
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36593 reference "sec:Notes"
36600 \begin_layout Subsection
36604 \begin_layout Standard
36605 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36607 Branches are described in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "sec:Branches"
36621 \begin_layout Subsection
36625 \begin_layout Standard
36626 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36627 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36629 An example is the document class
36630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36637 with three custom insets.
36640 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36644 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36650 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36653 \begin_layout Subsection
36655 \begin_inset Index idx
36658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36667 \begin_layout Standard
36668 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36670 For more information see chapter
36672 External Document Parts
36675 \begin_inset space ~
36681 \begin_layout Subsection
36683 \begin_inset Index idx
36686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36695 \begin_layout Standard
36696 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36697 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_layout Subsection
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36721 dialog as described in section
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36728 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36735 \begin_layout Subsection
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36744 as described in section
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36751 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36758 \begin_layout Subsection
36762 \begin_layout Standard
36767 as described in section
36768 \begin_inset space ~
36772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36781 \begin_layout Subsection
36783 \begin_inset Index idx
36786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36793 \begin_inset Index idx
36796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36797 Longtables ! Caption
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36807 Floats are described in section
36808 \begin_inset space ~
36812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36814 reference "sec:Floats"
36818 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_layout Subsection
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36838 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36845 reference "sec:Index"
36852 \begin_layout Subsection
36856 \begin_layout Standard
36857 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36858 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36864 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36871 \begin_layout Subsection
36875 \begin_layout Standard
36876 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36877 Tables are described in section
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36884 reference "sec:Tables"
36888 and in detail in the chapter
36895 \begin_inset space ~
36903 \begin_layout Subsection
36907 \begin_layout Standard
36913 Graphics are described in section
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36920 reference "sec:Graphics"
36927 \begin_layout Subsection
36931 \begin_layout Standard
36932 Inserts a URL as described in section
36933 \begin_inset space ~
36937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36939 reference "sub:URLs"
36946 \begin_layout Subsection
36950 \begin_layout Standard
36951 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36958 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36965 \begin_layout Subsection
36969 \begin_layout Standard
36970 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36977 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36984 \begin_layout Subsection
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36996 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37009 title or caption of a float.
37010 Inserts a short title as described in section
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37017 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37024 \begin_layout Subsection
37028 \begin_layout Standard
37029 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37036 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37043 \begin_layout Subsection
37045 \begin_inset Index idx
37048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37057 \begin_layout Standard
37058 Inserts a program listings box.
37059 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37061 Program Code Listings
37066 \begin_inset space ~
37074 \begin_layout Subsection
37078 \begin_layout Standard
37079 Inserts the actual date.
37080 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37082 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_layout Subsection
37102 \begin_layout Standard
37103 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37110 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37117 \begin_layout Section
37119 \begin_inset Index idx
37122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37131 \begin_layout Standard
37132 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37136 of the current document.
37137 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37140 \begin_layout Subsection
37144 \begin_layout Standard
37145 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37146 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37147 to jump, for example, between section
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37152 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37156 2.5 and use the submenu
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37180 \begin_inset space ~
37186 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37190 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37196 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37199 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37202 \begin_layout Standard
37203 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37212 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37220 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37223 \begin_layout Subsection
37224 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37227 \begin_layout Standard
37228 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37232 \begin_layout Subsection
37236 \begin_layout Standard
37237 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37238 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37239 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37255 \begin_layout Subsection
37259 \begin_layout Standard
37260 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37263 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37278 manual for a detailed description.
37281 \begin_layout Section
37283 \begin_inset Index idx
37286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37295 \begin_layout Subsection
37299 \begin_layout Standard
37300 Change Tracking is described in section
37301 \begin_inset space ~
37305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37307 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37314 \begin_layout Subsection
37319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 \begin_layout Standard
37330 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37332 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37333 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37334 to the clipboard or update the view.
37335 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37338 \begin_layout Subsection
37339 Start Appendix Here
37342 \begin_layout Standard
37343 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37344 as described in section
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37351 reference "sec:Appendices"
37358 \begin_layout Subsection
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37366 \begin_layout Standard
37367 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37368 default output format for the document (menu
37370 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37371 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37372 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37390 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37394 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37396 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37397 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37402 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37407 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37425 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37429 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37430 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37432 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37433 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37435 \begin_inset space ~
37438 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37443 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37453 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37458 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37459 The default output format is
37462 \begin_inset space ~
37470 \begin_layout Subsection
37471 View (Other Formats)
37474 \begin_layout Standard
37475 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37476 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37477 actual document with an external program.
37478 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37479 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37480 All possible formats are listed in section
37481 \begin_inset space ~
37485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37487 reference "sub:Export"
37492 You should at least see the menu entry
37497 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37498 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37505 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37510 \begin_inset Index idx
37513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37514 Reconfiguration of LyX
37522 \begin_layout Standard
37523 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37524 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37526 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37527 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37529 \begin_inset space ~
37532 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37537 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37547 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37552 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37555 \begin_layout Subsection
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_layout Standard
37564 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37565 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37568 \begin_layout Subsection
37569 Update (Other Formats)
37572 \begin_layout Standard
37573 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37574 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37577 \begin_layout Subsection
37578 View Master Document
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37582 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37603 manual for more information on this topic).
37604 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37605 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37618 generates the output of the whole book, while
37622 will just output the chapter alone.
37625 \begin_layout Standard
37626 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37627 in the document settings (menu
37629 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37630 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37631 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37649 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37653 ) or in the preferences (menu
37655 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37656 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37658 \begin_inset space ~
37661 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37666 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37672 \begin_inset space ~
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37684 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37691 \begin_layout Subsection
37692 Update Master Document
37695 \begin_layout Standard
37696 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37717 manual for more information on this topic).
37718 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37719 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37722 \begin_layout Standard
37723 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37724 in the document settings (menu
37726 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37727 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37728 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37730 \begin_inset space ~
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37740 \begin_inset space ~
37744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37746 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37750 ) or in the preferences (menu
37752 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37753 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37755 \begin_inset space ~
37758 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37760 \begin_inset space ~
37763 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset space ~
37779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37781 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37788 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 \begin_layout Standard
37793 Un/compresses the current document.
37796 \begin_layout Subsection
37800 \begin_layout Standard
37801 The document settings are described in appendix
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37808 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37815 \begin_layout Section
37817 \begin_inset Index idx
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37829 \begin_layout Subsection
37833 \begin_layout Standard
37834 Spell checking is explained in section
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37841 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37848 \begin_layout Subsection
37852 \begin_layout Standard
37853 The thesaurus is described in section
37854 \begin_inset space ~
37858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37860 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37867 \begin_layout Subsection
37869 \begin_inset Index idx
37872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37879 \begin_inset Index idx
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37891 \begin_layout Standard
37892 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37893 the highlighted document part.
37896 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37909 \begin_inset Index idx
37912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37921 \begin_layout Standard
37922 Generates with the help of the program
37926 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37927 This feature is not available on Windows.
37930 \begin_layout Subsection
37935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37943 \begin_inset Index idx
37946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37955 \begin_layout Standard
37956 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37961 \begin_inset space ~
37966 to see the full filename paths.
37969 \begin_layout Subsection
37971 \begin_inset Index idx
37974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 \begin_layout Standard
37984 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37991 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37998 \begin_layout Subsection
38000 \begin_inset Index idx
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38004 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
38008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38015 Reconfiguration of LyX
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38032 \begin_inset Index idx
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38036 Reconfiguration of LyX
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
38046 needs; see also section
38047 \begin_inset space ~
38051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38053 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38060 \begin_layout Subsection
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38069 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38076 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38083 \begin_layout Section
38085 \begin_inset Index idx
38088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38097 \begin_layout Standard
38098 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38100 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38104 \begin_layout Standard
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38113 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38114 found by LyX (see also section
38115 \begin_inset space ~
38119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38121 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38132 \begin_inset space ~
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38148 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38152 \begin_layout Section
38154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38156 name "sec:Toolbars"
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38164 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38165 \begin_inset space ~
38169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38171 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38178 \begin_layout Standard
38179 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38180 This is described in the
38182 Additional Features
38187 \begin_layout Subsection
38189 \begin_inset Index idx
38192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 \begin_inset Graphics
38203 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38211 \begin_layout Standard
38212 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 \begin_inset Note Note
38239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38240 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38245 manual for more information.
38253 \begin_layout Standard
38254 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 \begin_inset Tabular
38262 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38263 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38264 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 \begin_inset Graphics
38272 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38286 pull-down box for the environments
38299 \begin_layout Standard
38300 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38306 \begin_layout Standard
38308 \begin_inset Tabular
38309 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38310 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38311 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38312 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38366 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38412 arg "dialog-show print"
38420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38426 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38442 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38456 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38546 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38576 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38622 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38636 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38719 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38747 Emphasize text, function of the
38749 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38751 \begin_inset space ~
38754 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38784 Set text to noun style, function of the
38786 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38791 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38809 arg "textstyle-apply"
38817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 Format text using the current settings in the
38823 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38825 \begin_inset space ~
38828 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38837 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38861 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38863 \begin_inset space ~
38872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38895 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38909 arg "tabular-insert"
38917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38951 Toggle outline window on/off,
38953 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39008 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39021 \begin_layout Subsection
39023 \begin_inset Index idx
39026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39035 \begin_layout Standard
39036 \begin_inset Graphics
39037 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39045 \begin_layout Standard
39046 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39052 \begin_layout Standard
39053 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39057 \begin_layout Standard
39058 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39064 \begin_layout Standard
39065 \begin_inset Tabular
39066 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39067 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39068 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39069 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39106 arg "layout Enumerate"
39114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 arg "layout Itemize"
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39187 arg "layout Description"
39195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 arg "depth-increment"
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_inset space ~
39243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39252 arg "depth-decrement"
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39268 \begin_inset space ~
39272 \begin_inset space ~
39281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39290 arg "float-insert figure"
39298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39304 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39305 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 arg "float-insert table"
39329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39336 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39382 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39396 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39412 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39456 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39476 arg "nomencl-insert"
39484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39490 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39492 \begin_inset space ~
39501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39510 arg "footnote-insert"
39518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39524 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39540 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39554 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39588 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39589 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 \begin_inset space ~
39611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39620 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39634 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39694 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39744 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39760 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39774 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39775 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39777 \begin_inset space ~
39786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39795 arg "dialog-show character"
39803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39814 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39830 arg "layout-paragraph"
39838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39844 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39846 \begin_inset space ~
39855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39878 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39892 \begin_layout Subsection
39893 View/Update Toolbar
39894 \begin_inset Index idx
39897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 Toolbar ! View / Update
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 \begin_inset Graphics
39908 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39915 \begin_layout Standard
39916 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39922 \begin_layout Standard
39923 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39927 \begin_layout Standard
39928 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39934 \begin_layout Standard
39935 \begin_inset Tabular
39936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39937 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39938 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39939 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39963 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39979 arg "buffer-update"
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 arg "master-buffer-view"
40017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40043 arg "master-buffer-update"
40051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40081 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40095 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40096 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40097 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40098 Synchronize with Output
40104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40109 \begin_inset Graphics
40110 filename ../images/view-others.png
40112 groupId toolbarbuttons
40123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40129 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40130 View (Other Formats)
40136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40141 \begin_inset Graphics
40142 filename ../images/update-others.png
40144 groupId toolbarbuttons
40153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40159 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40160 Update (Other Formats)
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40178 \begin_layout Subsection
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40194 , the table toolbar
40195 \begin_inset Index idx
40198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40207 \begin_inset space ~
40212 manual and the math macro toolbar
40213 \begin_inset Index idx
40216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40229 \begin_layout Chapter
40230 The Document Settings
40231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40233 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40238 \begin_inset Index idx
40241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40242 Document ! Settings
40250 \begin_layout Standard
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40259 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40260 is called with the menu
40262 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40266 You can save your document settings as default with the
40268 Save as Document Defaults
40270 button in any dialog.
40271 This will create a template named
40275 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40284 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40285 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40288 \begin_layout Standard
40289 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40290 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40291 to find the one you are looking for.
40292 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40293 the submenus of the dialog.
40295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40299 \begin_inset space \space{}
40303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40310 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40311 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40312 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40315 \begin_layout Section
40319 \begin_layout Standard
40320 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40322 Document classes are described in section
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40329 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40337 \begin_layout Standard
40341 \begin_inset space ~
40346 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40350 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40351 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40353 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 Some classes use special class options by default.
40364 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40368 and you can decide to use them or not.
40369 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40370 recommended you leave them untouched.
40375 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40380 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40381 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40387 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40388 \begin_inset Newline newline
40393 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40396 \begin_inset Newline newline
40399 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40405 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40407 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40424 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40425 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40426 document is opened without its master.
40427 This way child documents are always compilable.
40428 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40443 \begin_layout Standard
40444 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40454 \begin_inset Index idx
40457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40458 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40464 \begin_inset Index idx
40467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40473 for cross-references, see section
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40480 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40487 \begin_layout Section
40491 \begin_layout Standard
40492 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40493 Please refer to the section
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40509 manual for details.
40512 \begin_layout Section
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40517 Modules are explained in section
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40524 reference "sub:Modules"
40531 \begin_layout Section
40535 \begin_layout Standard
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40543 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40550 \begin_layout Section
40554 \begin_layout Standard
40555 The document font settings are described in section
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40562 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40569 \begin_layout Section
40573 \begin_layout Standard
40574 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40591 and whether it should be a
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40599 can also be specified here.
40602 \begin_layout Standard
40603 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40605 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40607 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40613 Use justification in LyX work area
40615 you can decide if LyX justifies the text on screen.
40616 This only affects the text inside LyX not in the output.
40619 \begin_layout Section
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40624 This dialog is described in sections
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40631 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40638 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40645 \begin_layout Section
40649 \begin_layout Standard
40650 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40651 \begin_inset space ~
40655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40657 reference "sub:Margins"
40664 \begin_layout Section
40666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40668 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40673 \begin_inset Index idx
40676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40677 Language ! Encoding
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40686 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40687 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40688 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40689 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40690 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40691 known for a particular character).
40694 \begin_layout Standard
40695 If you use the option
40699 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40700 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40701 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40702 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40703 exactly one encoding.
40704 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40707 \begin_layout Standard
40708 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40709 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40710 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40711 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40712 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40713 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40718 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40719 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40720 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40721 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40722 engines to standard LaTeX.
40723 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40724 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40727 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40771 \begin_inset space ~
40775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40777 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40782 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40786 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40789 \begin_layout Standard
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40798 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40808 The possible settings are:
40811 \begin_layout Description
40812 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40814 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40815 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40825 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40832 \begin_layout Description
40833 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40834 format you will use.
40835 In many cases this will be
40840 \begin_inset Index idx
40843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40844 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40850 If the newer package
40855 \begin_inset Index idx
40858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40859 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40864 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40865 this package will be used instead of
40872 \begin_layout Description
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40885 would be more appropriate.
40888 \begin_layout Description
40889 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40890 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40894 (for German texts), type in
40897 \begin_inset Newline newline
40902 usepackage{ngerman}
40905 \begin_layout Description
40906 None will not use a language package.
40907 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40910 \begin_layout Standard
40911 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40914 \begin_layout Description
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40931 , but the LaTeX-package
40936 \begin_inset Index idx
40939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40940 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40946 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40947 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40948 languages in TeX code.
40951 \begin_layout Description
40952 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40953 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40954 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40957 \begin_layout Description
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40966 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40969 \begin_layout Description
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40978 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40981 \begin_layout Description
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40986 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40989 \begin_layout Description
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40998 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40999 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41011 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41015 \begin_layout Description
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41024 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41025 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41028 \begin_layout Description
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41041 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_layout Description
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41058 \begin_inset space ~
41061 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41062 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41065 \begin_layout Description
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41071 \begin_inset space ~
41074 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41075 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41076 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41087 \begin_layout Description
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41096 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41097 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41098 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41099 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41100 \begin_inset space ~
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41110 \begin_layout Description
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41119 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41122 \begin_layout Description
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41131 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41134 \begin_layout Description
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41143 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41146 \begin_layout Description
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41151 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41154 \begin_layout Description
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41159 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41162 \begin_layout Description
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41171 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41174 \begin_layout Description
41176 \begin_inset space ~
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_layout Description
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41192 \begin_inset space ~
41195 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41198 \begin_layout Description
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_layout Description
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41219 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41224 \begin_inset Index idx
41227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41228 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41233 , when using this, set the document language to
41238 \begin_layout Description
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41247 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41251 , when using this, set the document language to
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_layout Description
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41269 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41274 \begin_inset Index idx
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41278 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41283 , when using this, set the document language to
41288 \begin_layout Description
41290 \begin_inset space ~
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41297 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41301 , when using this, set the document language to
41306 \begin_layout Description
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41315 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41319 , when using this, set the document language to
41324 \begin_layout Description
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41329 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41332 \begin_layout Description
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41345 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41348 \begin_layout Description
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41361 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41362 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41363 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41366 \begin_layout Description
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41387 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41388 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41391 \begin_layout Description
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41400 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41405 \begin_inset Index idx
41408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41414 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41417 \begin_layout Description
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41423 \begin_inset space ~
41426 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41434 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41439 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41441 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41444 \begin_layout Description
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41453 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41458 \begin_inset Index idx
41461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41467 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41470 \begin_layout Description
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41475 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41480 \begin_inset Index idx
41483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41484 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41490 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41494 \begin_layout Description
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41507 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41514 \begin_layout Description
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41527 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41528 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41529 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41533 \begin_layout Description
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41546 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41547 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41550 \begin_layout Section
41552 \begin_inset Index idx
41555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41562 \begin_inset Index idx
41565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 \begin_inset Index idx
41575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41576 Color ! Shaded boxes
41582 \begin_inset Index idx
41585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41586 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41594 \begin_layout Standard
41595 Here you can alter the font color for the
41599 (default: black), for
41602 \begin_inset space ~
41607 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41611 (default: white) and for
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41624 sets the color back to the default.
41627 \begin_layout Standard
41628 Clicking any button showing
41636 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41637 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41638 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41639 later more quickly.
41642 \begin_layout Standard
41643 Note, if you change the
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41651 font color and use the option
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41659 in the document settings under
41662 \begin_inset space ~
41667 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41674 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41681 \begin_layout Standard
41682 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41692 \begin_inset space ~
41701 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41706 Code after a forced page break:
41709 \begin_layout Itemize
41710 For the page color:
41711 \begin_inset Newline newline
41718 pagecolor{color name}
41721 \begin_layout Itemize
41722 For the text color:
41723 \begin_inset Newline newline
41733 \begin_layout Standard
41734 You are restricted to one of
41770 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_inset Newline newline
41786 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41787 names to refer to them:
41790 \begin_layout Itemize
41796 \begin_inset Newline newline
41801 page_backgroundcolor
41804 \begin_layout Itemize
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41814 \begin_inset Newline newline
41822 \begin_layout Itemize
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset Newline newline
41840 \begin_layout Itemize
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_inset Newline newline
41858 \begin_layout Standard
41859 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41878 \begin_layout Section
41882 \begin_layout Standard
41883 Here you can adjust the
41887 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41891 as described in section
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41898 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41905 \begin_layout Section
41909 \begin_layout Standard
41910 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41915 \begin_inset Index idx
41918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41929 \begin_inset Index idx
41932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41933 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41941 Sectioned bibliography
41943 using the LaTeX package
41948 \begin_inset Index idx
41951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41952 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41957 and you can select a
41961 for the generation of the bibliography.
41962 For a further description see section
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41969 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41976 \begin_layout Section
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41981 Here you can define the
41985 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41987 \begin_inset space ~
41991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41993 reference "sec:Index"
42000 \begin_layout Section
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42005 The PDF properties are explained in section
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42012 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42019 \begin_layout Section
42023 \begin_layout Standard
42024 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
42029 \begin_inset Index idx
42032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42033 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
42043 \begin_inset Index idx
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42047 LaTeX-packages ! amssymb
42057 \begin_inset Index idx
42060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 LaTeX-packages ! cancel
42071 \begin_inset Index idx
42074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 LaTeX-packages ! esint
42085 \begin_inset Index idx
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42099 \begin_inset Index idx
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42103 LaTeX-packages ! mathtools
42113 \begin_inset Index idx
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42117 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42127 \begin_inset Index idx
42130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42131 LaTeX-packages ! stackrel
42141 \begin_inset Index idx
42144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42145 LaTeX-packages ! stmaryrd
42155 \begin_inset Index idx
42158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 LaTeX-packages ! undertilde
42164 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42167 \begin_layout Description
42168 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42169 ensure that you have this enabled.
42172 \begin_layout Description
42173 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42174 letters, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, ensure that you have
42178 \begin_layout Description
42179 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42182 \begin_inset space ~
42194 \begin_layout Description
42195 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42210 \begin_layout Description
42211 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42222 \begin_layout Description
42223 mathtools is used for the math commands
42259 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42266 \begin_layout Description
42267 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42269 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42278 \begin_layout Description
42279 stackrel is used for the math command
42296 \begin_layout Description
42297 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42300 \begin_layout Description
42301 undertilde is used for the math command
42309 Accents for one Character
42318 \begin_layout Section
42322 \begin_layout Standard
42323 The float placement options are described in the section
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42334 \begin_inset space ~
42342 \begin_layout Section
42346 \begin_layout Standard
42347 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42349 Program Code Listings
42354 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_layout Section
42366 \begin_layout Standard
42367 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42375 set to be used and set the
42380 The itemize environment is described in section
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42387 reference "sec:Itemize"
42394 \begin_layout Standard
42395 You can furthermore specify a
42398 \begin_inset space ~
42403 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42404 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42411 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42417 \begin_inset space \space{}
42421 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42431 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42432 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42435 \begin_layout Standard
42436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42447 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42448 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42456 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42460 usepackage{textcomp}
42463 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42467 usepackage{amssymb}
42477 \begin_layout Section
42481 \begin_layout Standard
42482 Branches are described in section
42483 \begin_inset space ~
42487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42489 reference "sec:Branches"
42496 \begin_layout Section
42498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42500 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42507 \begin_layout Standard
42508 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42511 \begin_layout Description
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42517 \begin_inset space ~
42520 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42540 View Master Document
42541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42548 Update Master Document
42549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42556 menu or the toolbar.
42557 The default is set in
42559 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42560 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42565 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42569 \begin_inset space ~
42573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42575 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42582 \begin_layout Description
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42591 Output settings for the menu
42593 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42595 \begin_inset space ~
42601 For a detailed description see section
42603 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42608 \begin_inset space ~
42616 \begin_layout Description
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42625 Options offers settings for the export format
42631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42649 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42650 \begin_inset space ~
42653 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42662 settings are described in detail in section
42664 Math Output in XHTML
42669 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_inset space ~
42682 \begin_inset space ~
42687 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42690 \begin_layout Section
42695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42706 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42707 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42708 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42709 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42713 \begin_layout Standard
42714 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42721 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42728 \begin_layout Chapter
42734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42736 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42741 \begin_inset Index idx
42744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42753 \begin_layout Standard
42754 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42756 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42760 It has the following submenus.
42763 \begin_layout Section
42767 \begin_layout Subsection
42771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42772 User Interface File
42773 \begin_inset Index idx
42776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42777 Customization ! of toolbars
42783 \begin_inset Index idx
42786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 Customization ! of menus
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42796 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42797 interface (ui) file.
42798 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42806 \begin_layout Description
42811 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42814 \begin_layout Description
42821 the menu entries in popup context menus
42824 \begin_layout Description
42829 specifies the toolbar buttons
42832 \begin_layout Standard
42833 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42834 and edit the entries.
42837 \begin_layout Standard
42838 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42850 entries must be finished with an explicit
42875 and in the case of the
42876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42888 The syntax for the entries is:
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42892 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42922 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42925 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42927 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42940 \begin_inset space ~
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42949 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42955 \begin_layout Standard
42956 For example, assuming you use the menu
42958 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42961 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42966 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42990 \begin_layout Standard
42992 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43007 to have the sixth bookmark.
43010 \begin_layout Standard
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43019 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
43020 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43024 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43038 Enable tool tips in main work area
43040 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43053 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
43056 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43058 \begin_inset space ~
43066 \begin_layout Subsection
43070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43077 Restore window layouts and geometries
43079 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
43080 in the last LyX session.
43083 \begin_layout Standard
43086 Restore cursor positions
43088 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43092 \begin_layout Standard
43095 Load opened files from last session
43097 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
43100 \begin_layout Standard
43103 Clear all session information
43105 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
43106 of last opened documents, etc.).
43109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43113 name "sub:Backup documents"
43118 \begin_inset Index idx
43121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43133 Backup original documents when saving
43135 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43136 it was saved the last time.
43137 It is stored in the
43140 \begin_inset space ~
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43152 reference "sec:Paths"
43156 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43159 \begin_inset space ~
43165 The backup file has the file extension
43166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43180 \begin_layout Standard
43183 Backup documents, every
43185 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43188 \begin_layout Standard
43191 Save documents compressed by default
43193 always saves files in a compressed format.
43196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43197 Windows & work area
43200 \begin_layout Standard
43203 Open documents in tabs
43205 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
43208 \begin_layout Standard
43213 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
43217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43225 reference "sec:Paths"
43229 for information about LyXServer pipes.
43235 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
43237 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
43240 \begin_layout Standard
43243 Single close-tab button
43245 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43248 \begin_inset Graphics
43249 filename ../images/closetab.png
43256 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43257 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43260 \begin_layout Standard
43261 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43269 For this option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43277 \begin_layout Standard
43282 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43284 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43286 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43290 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43291 instances of LyX and only want to close the view in once instance.
43294 \begin_layout Subsection
43296 \begin_inset Index idx
43299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43308 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43315 \begin_layout Standard
43316 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 This section only deals with the fonts
43333 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43336 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43337 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43349 By default, LyX uses
43365 (depends on the system) as its
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43385 You can change the font size with the
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43397 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43402 points have the size of 1
43403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43413 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43418 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43423 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43424 \begin_inset space ~
43428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43430 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43440 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43442 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43443 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43444 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43445 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43447 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43454 \begin_layout Subsection
43456 \begin_inset Index idx
43459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43466 \begin_inset Index idx
43469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43478 \begin_layout Standard
43479 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43480 the list and selecting the
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43488 By checking the option
43492 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43495 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43500 \begin_inset space ~
43505 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43508 \begin_layout Subsection
43510 \begin_inset Index idx
43513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43522 \begin_layout Standard
43523 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43526 \begin_layout Standard
43531 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43532 This feature is described in section
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43539 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43546 \begin_layout Standard
43547 Checking the option
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43554 \begin_inset space ~
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43563 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43566 \begin_layout Section
43568 \begin_inset Index idx
43571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43580 \begin_layout Subsection
43584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43591 Cursor follows scrollbar
43593 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43598 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43599 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43600 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43603 \begin_layout Standard
43606 Scroll below end of document
43608 is self-explanatory.
43611 \begin_layout Standard
43612 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43619 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43621 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43622 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43628 Sort environments alphabetically
43630 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43633 \begin_layout Standard
43636 Group environments by their category
43638 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43641 \begin_layout Standard
43646 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43661 \begin_layout Standard
43662 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43667 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43668 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43672 \begin_layout Subsection
43674 \begin_inset Index idx
43677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43684 \begin_inset Index idx
43687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 Settings ! Shortcuts
43696 \begin_layout Standard
43701 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43702 Several binding files are available, among them:
43705 \begin_layout Description
43706 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43709 \begin_layout Description
43710 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43722 \begin_layout Description
43723 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43734 \begin_layout Standard
43735 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43740 , and binding files for special languages.
43741 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43746 \begin_inset space \space{}
43750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43758 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43763 Some binding files, like
43767 , only have a limited scope.
43768 When looking at the end of the file
43772 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43775 \begin_layout Standard
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43788 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43789 in the selected key binding file.
43792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43796 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43801 \begin_inset Index idx
43804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43805 Key Bindings ! Editing
43813 \begin_layout Standard
43814 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43815 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43816 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43819 Show key-bindings containing
43822 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43823 Insert there for example as keyword
43824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43831 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43832 functions that contain
43833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43841 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43842 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43846 that you will find in the
43853 \begin_layout Standard
43854 For example, to add the shortcut
43862 , select the function and press the
43867 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43868 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43871 \begin_layout Standard
43872 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43873 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43874 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43875 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43876 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43881 \begin_layout Standard
43882 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43885 \begin_layout Standard
43886 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43888 The syntax of the entries is:
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43915 \begin_layout Subsection
43917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43919 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43924 \begin_inset Index idx
43927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 \begin_inset Index idx
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43947 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43948 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43949 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43950 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43962 and select the keyboard map file named
43969 \begin_layout Standard
43978 keyboard map and, if you use the
43982 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43985 arg "keymap-primary"
43991 arg "keymap-secondary"
43994 respectively or toggle between them with
43997 arg "keymap-toggle"
44003 \begin_layout Standard
44004 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44012 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44021 \begin_layout Standard
44022 You can also specify the mouse
44024 Wheel scrolling speed
44027 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44031 \begin_layout Standard
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44048 you can select a key for zooming.
44049 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44052 \begin_layout Subsection
44056 \begin_layout Standard
44057 Input completion is described in section
44058 \begin_inset space ~
44062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44064 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44071 \begin_layout Section
44073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44080 \begin_inset Index idx
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44090 \begin_inset Index idx
44093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44102 \begin_layout Standard
44103 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
44105 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44113 directory This is LyX's working directory.
44114 It is the default when you
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44133 \begin_layout Description
44135 \begin_inset space ~
44138 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44140 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44154 \begin_layout Description
44156 \begin_inset space ~
44159 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44165 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44169 \begin_inset Newline newline
44173 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44185 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44193 \begin_layout Description
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44199 \begin_inset Index idx
44202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44208 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44209 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44210 \begin_inset space ~
44214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44216 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44224 will be used to save the backups.
44225 \begin_inset Newline newline
44228 Backup files have the ending
44229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44239 \begin_layout Description
44244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44255 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44256 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
44257 \begin_inset Newline newline
44264 You add a BibTeX-database
44269 You can edit this file with the program
44278 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44287 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44292 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44293 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44299 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44300 \begin_inset Newline newline
44303 The pipe is also used for the
44308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44314 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44319 \begin_inset Newline newline
44322 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44323 \begin_inset Newline newline
44339 \begin_layout Description
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44344 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44347 \begin_layout Description
44349 \begin_inset space ~
44352 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44353 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44354 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44357 \begin_layout Description
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44362 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44368 You only need to specify it if you are using
44372 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44378 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44382 \begin_layout Description
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44387 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44388 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44389 where to find it on the system.
44390 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44391 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44400 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44401 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44404 \begin_layout Description
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44409 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44410 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44412 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44414 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44415 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44416 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44417 scanned for the input files.
44418 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44419 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44420 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44421 compilation may fail for some documents.
44424 \begin_layout Section
44428 \begin_layout Standard
44429 Here you can insert your
44438 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44446 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44450 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44453 \begin_layout Section
44455 \begin_inset Index idx
44458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 Language ! Settings
44465 \begin_inset Index idx
44468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44469 Settings ! Language
44477 \begin_layout Subsection
44479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44481 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44488 \begin_layout Description
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44497 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44498 You can find its actual translation status here:
44499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44501 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44508 \begin_layout Description
44510 \begin_inset space ~
44513 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44515 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44516 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44533 The most widespread language package is
44538 \begin_inset Index idx
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44547 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44548 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44549 alternative language package
44554 \begin_inset Index idx
44557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44558 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44563 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44564 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44570 The available selections are described in section
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44577 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44584 \begin_layout Description
44586 \begin_inset space ~
44589 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44590 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44591 An example is the start command
44597 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44617 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44622 \begin_layout Description
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44632 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44633 command toggles the package on and off.
44636 \begin_layout Description
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44642 \begin_inset space ~
44645 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44649 \begin_layout Description
44651 \begin_inset space ~
44655 \begin_inset space ~
44658 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in LyX's dialogs.
44661 \begin_layout Description
44663 \begin_inset space ~
44667 \begin_inset space ~
44670 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44671 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44672 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44673 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44680 \begin_layout Description
44682 \begin_inset space ~
44685 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44687 When this option is not set, the
44690 \begin_inset space ~
44695 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44696 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44699 \begin_inset space ~
44707 \begin_layout Description
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44715 \begin_inset space ~
44721 When it is not set, the
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44729 is set to the end of the document.
44732 \begin_layout Description
44734 \begin_inset space ~
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44741 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44742 language will be underlined in blue.
44745 \begin_layout Description
44747 \begin_inset space ~
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44754 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44755 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44758 \begin_layout Description
44760 \begin_inset space ~
44763 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44764 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44765 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44766 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44769 \begin_layout Subsection
44773 \begin_layout Standard
44774 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44781 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44788 \begin_layout Section
44792 \begin_layout Subsection
44796 \begin_layout Description
44798 \begin_inset space ~
44802 \begin_inset space ~
44805 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44808 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44809 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44811 \begin_inset space ~
44817 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44820 \begin_layout Description
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44826 \begin_inset Index idx
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 \begin_inset Index idx
44839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44840 Settings ! Date format
44845 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44846 \begin_inset Newline newline
44850 \begin_inset Flex URL
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44861 \begin_inset Newline newline
44864 For example the format
44865 \begin_inset Newline newline
44869 \begin_inset Newline newline
44872 prints the date as day/month/year.
44875 \begin_layout Description
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44884 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44887 \begin_layout Description
44889 \begin_inset space ~
44892 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44894 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44902 For a detailed description see section
44904 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44917 \begin_layout Subsection
44919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44926 \begin_inset Index idx
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 \begin_inset Index idx
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44948 \begin_layout Description
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44953 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44958 The name will be used when the
44963 \begin_inset Newline newline
44967 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44975 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44988 command is the command LyX
44989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44996 LaTeX uses for printing.
45004 \begin_layout Description
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45010 \begin_inset space ~
45013 Options Here you can specify printer options.
45014 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
45015 of the program that provides the
45022 \begin_layout Description
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45032 \begin_inset space ~
45035 printer This option works only for the
45040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45052 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
45053 This is an option only for dvips experts.
45056 \begin_layout Subsection
45061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45071 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
45076 \begin_inset Index idx
45079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 \begin_layout Description
45090 \begin_inset space ~
45097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45112 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45117 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45138 are used for Cyrillic.
45139 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45152 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45153 LyX sets up in the background.
45154 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45157 \begin_layout Description
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45166 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45171 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
45174 \begin_layout Description
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45191 options They only have an effect when the program
45195 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45198 \begin_layout Standard
45199 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45200 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45201 manuals of the applications.
45204 \begin_layout Description
45206 \begin_inset space ~
45209 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45210 \begin_inset space ~
45214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45216 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
45223 \begin_layout Description
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45228 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45229 \begin_inset space ~
45233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45235 reference "sub:Index-Program"
45242 \begin_layout Description
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45247 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45254 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
45261 \begin_layout Description
45266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45277 command Command for the program
45281 that is described in the section
45287 Additional Features
45292 \begin_layout Standard
45293 There are additionally the following options:
45296 \begin_layout Description
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset space ~
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45310 \begin_inset space ~
45314 \begin_inset space ~
45317 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45335 to separate folders.
45336 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45337 \begin_inset Index idx
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45347 \begin_inset Index idx
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 \begin_layout Description
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45381 \begin_inset space ~
45384 changes Removes all manually set
45390 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45391 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45393 \begin_inset space ~
45398 dialog when changing the document class.
45401 \begin_layout Section
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45407 \begin_inset Index idx
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 \begin_layout Subsection
45421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45423 name "sub:Converters"
45428 \begin_inset Index idx
45431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45440 \begin_layout Standard
45441 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45442 from one format to another.
45443 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45444 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45451 \begin_inset space ~
45456 field and press the
45461 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45470 drop-down list, modify the
45474 field and press the
45481 \begin_layout Standard
45484 Converter File Cache
45490 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45492 Maximum Age (in days
45495 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45496 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45499 \begin_layout Standard
45500 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45501 definition, is described in the section
45512 \begin_layout Subsection
45514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45516 name "sec:File-Formats"
45521 \begin_inset Index idx
45524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 \begin_inset Index idx
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45543 \begin_layout Standard
45544 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45553 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45556 \begin_layout Standard
45557 You can also define the
45559 Default output format
45561 that is used when you use
45563 View, Update, View Master Document
45567 Update Master Document
45573 menu or the toolbar.
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45577 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45588 \begin_layout Standard
45589 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45590 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45591 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45592 This is done by specifying a
45597 More about this is described in the section
45608 \begin_layout Chapter
45609 Units available in LyX
45610 \begin_inset Index idx
45613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45622 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45637 reference "tab:Units"
45641 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45644 \begin_layout Standard
45645 \begin_inset Float table
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45678 \begin_inset Tabular
45679 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45680 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45833 scaled point (65536
45834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45894 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45949 % of original image width
45956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46163 \begin_layout Chapter
46165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46167 name "chap:Credits"
46174 \begin_layout Standard
46175 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46176 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46179 \begin_layout Itemize
46182 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46185 \begin_layout Itemize
46191 \begin_layout Itemize
46197 \begin_layout Itemize
46203 \begin_layout Itemize
46209 \begin_layout Itemize
46215 \begin_layout Itemize
46221 \begin_layout Itemize
46227 \begin_layout Itemize
46230 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46233 \begin_layout Itemize
46239 \begin_layout Itemize
46245 \begin_layout Itemize
46251 \begin_layout Itemize
46257 \begin_layout Itemize
46263 \begin_layout Itemize
46269 \begin_layout Itemize
46275 \begin_layout Itemize
46281 \begin_layout Itemize
46283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46292 \begin_layout Standard
46293 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46296 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46303 \begin_layout Bibliography
46304 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46305 LatexCommand bibitem
46312 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46315 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46320 \begin_inset Newline newline
46324 \begin_inset Flex URL
46327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46329 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46337 \begin_layout Bibliography
46338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46339 LatexCommand bibitem
46340 key "latexcompanion"
46344 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46346 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46349 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46352 \begin_layout Bibliography
46353 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46354 LatexCommand bibitem
46359 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46362 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46365 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46368 \begin_layout Bibliography
46369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46370 LatexCommand bibitem
46377 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46380 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46383 \begin_layout Bibliography
46384 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46385 LatexCommand bibitem
46397 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46400 \begin_layout Bibliography
46401 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46402 LatexCommand bibitem
46408 \begin_inset Newline newline
46412 \begin_inset Flex URL
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46417 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46425 \begin_layout Bibliography
46426 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46427 LatexCommand bibitem
46433 \begin_inset Newline newline
46437 \begin_inset Flex URL
46440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46450 \begin_layout Bibliography
46451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46452 LatexCommand bibitem
46458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46460 name "Documentation"
46461 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46470 \begin_inset Newline newline
46474 \begin_inset Flex URL
46477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46479 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46487 \begin_layout Bibliography
46488 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46489 LatexCommand bibitem
46495 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46497 name "Documentation"
46498 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46502 how to use the program
46507 \begin_inset Newline newline
46511 \begin_inset Flex URL
46514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46516 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46524 \begin_layout Bibliography
46525 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46526 LatexCommand bibitem
46532 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46534 name "Documentation"
46535 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46544 \begin_inset Newline newline
46548 \begin_inset Flex URL
46551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46561 \begin_layout Bibliography
46562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46563 LatexCommand bibitem
46569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46571 name "Documentation"
46572 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46581 \begin_inset Newline newline
46585 \begin_inset Flex URL
46588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46590 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46598 \begin_layout Bibliography
46599 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46600 LatexCommand bibitem
46606 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46608 name "Documentation"
46609 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46613 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46614 \begin_inset Newline newline
46618 \begin_inset Flex URL
46621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46631 \begin_layout Bibliography
46632 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46633 LatexCommand bibitem
46639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46641 name "Documentation"
46642 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46646 of the LaTeX-package
46651 \begin_inset Index idx
46654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46655 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46661 \begin_inset Newline newline
46665 \begin_inset Flex URL
46668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46670 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46678 \begin_layout Bibliography
46679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46680 LatexCommand bibitem
46686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46688 name "Documentation"
46689 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46693 of the LaTeX-package
46698 \begin_inset Index idx
46701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46702 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46708 \begin_inset Newline newline
46712 \begin_inset Flex URL
46715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46717 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46725 \begin_layout Bibliography
46726 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46727 LatexCommand bibitem
46733 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46735 name "Documentation"
46736 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46740 of the LaTeX-package
46745 \begin_inset Index idx
46748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46749 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46755 \begin_inset Newline newline
46759 \begin_inset Flex URL
46762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46764 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46772 \begin_layout Bibliography
46773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46774 LatexCommand bibitem
46780 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46782 name "Documentation"
46783 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46787 of the LaTeX-package
46792 \begin_inset Index idx
46795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46796 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46802 \begin_inset Newline newline
46806 \begin_inset Flex URL
46809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46811 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46819 \begin_layout Bibliography
46820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46821 LatexCommand bibitem
46827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46829 name "Documentation"
46830 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46834 of the LaTeX-package
46839 \begin_inset Index idx
46842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46843 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46849 \begin_inset Newline newline
46853 \begin_inset Flex URL
46856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46858 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46866 \begin_layout Bibliography
46867 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46868 LatexCommand bibitem
46874 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46876 name "Documentation"
46877 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46881 of the LaTeX-package
46886 \begin_inset Index idx
46889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46890 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46896 \begin_inset Newline newline
46900 \begin_inset Flex URL
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46913 \begin_layout Bibliography
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46915 LatexCommand bibitem
46921 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46923 name "Documentation"
46924 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46928 of the LaTeX-package
46933 \begin_inset Index idx
46936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46937 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46943 \begin_inset Newline newline
46947 \begin_inset Flex URL
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46960 \begin_layout Bibliography
46961 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46962 LatexCommand bibitem
46968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46971 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46975 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46976 \begin_inset Newline newline
46980 \begin_inset Flex URL
46983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46985 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46993 \begin_layout Bibliography
46994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46995 LatexCommand bibitem
47001 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47004 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47008 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
47009 \begin_inset Newline newline
47013 \begin_inset Flex URL
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47026 \begin_layout Bibliography
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47028 LatexCommand bibitem
47034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47037 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47041 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
47042 \begin_inset Newline newline
47046 \begin_inset Flex URL
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47051 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47059 \begin_layout Bibliography
47060 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47061 LatexCommand bibitem
47067 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47070 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47074 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
47075 \begin_inset Newline newline
47079 \begin_inset Flex URL
47082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47084 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47092 \begin_layout Bibliography
47093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47094 LatexCommand bibitem
47100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47103 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47107 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
47108 \begin_inset Newline newline
47112 \begin_inset Flex URL
47115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47117 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47125 \begin_layout Bibliography
47126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47127 LatexCommand bibitem
47133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47136 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47140 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
47141 \begin_inset Newline newline
47145 \begin_inset Flex URL
47148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47158 \begin_layout Bibliography
47159 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47160 LatexCommand bibitem
47166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47169 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47173 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
47174 \begin_inset Newline newline
47178 \begin_inset Flex URL
47181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47183 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47191 \begin_layout Bibliography
47192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47193 LatexCommand bibitem
47199 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47202 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47206 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
47207 \begin_inset Newline newline
47211 \begin_inset Flex URL
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47216 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47224 \begin_layout Bibliography
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47226 LatexCommand bibitem
47232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47235 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47239 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
47240 \begin_inset Newline newline
47244 \begin_inset Flex URL
47247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47249 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47257 \begin_layout Bibliography
47258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47259 LatexCommand bibitem
47265 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47268 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47272 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
47273 \begin_inset Newline newline
47277 \begin_inset Flex URL
47280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47282 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47290 \begin_layout Bibliography
47291 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47292 LatexCommand bibitem
47298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47301 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47305 about new features in
47310 \begin_inset Newline newline
47314 \begin_inset Flex URL
47317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47327 \begin_layout Standard
47328 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47362 \begin_inset Note Note
47365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47372 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47373 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47374 bibliography is the second one:
47382 \begin_layout Standard
47383 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47384 LatexCommand bibtex
47385 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47386 options "biblio/alphadin"
47393 \begin_layout Standard
47394 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47397 \begin_layout Standard
47398 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47399 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47405 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47406 LatexCommand printindex